3008_en_Chap00_Couv-debut_ed01-2015
Handbook
3008_en_Chap00_Couv-debut_ed01-2015
On-line handbook
This personal space offers advice and other useful information for
the care and maintenance of your vehicle.
Select one of the following means of access to view your
handbook on-line...
Referring to the handbook on-line also gives you access to the
latest information available, easily identified by the bookmark,
associated with this symbol:
If the "MyPEUGEOT" function is not available on the PEUGEOT
public website for your country, you can find your handbook at the
following address:
http://public.servicebox.peugeot.com/ddb/
the language,
the vehicle, its body style,
the print edition of your handbook appropriate for the date of registration of
your vehicle.
Select:
Find your handbook on the PEUGEOT website, under
"MyPEUGEOT".
Scan this code for direct access to your handbook.
Welcome
Thank you for choosing a 3008.
Key
safety warning additional information contributes to the protection of
the environment
This handbook describes all of the equipment available in the whole
range.
Your vehicle will be fitted with some of this equipment described in this
document, depending on its trim level, version and the specification for
the country in which it is sold.
The descriptions and illustrations are given without any obligation.
Automobiles PEUGEOT reserves the right to modify the technical
specifications, equipment and accessories without having to update
this edition of the handbook.
This document is an integral part of your vehicle. It should be passed
on to the new user in the event of sale or transfer.
This handbook has been designed to help you make the most of
using your vehicle in all circumstances.
.
.
Contents
3008_en_Chap00a_sommaire_ed01-2015
Interior ttings 94
Front armrest 96
Rear multimedia 98
Panoramic sunroof 101
Boot ttings 103
Fittings
Child seats 109
Deactivating the passenger's front airbag 111
ISOFIX mountings 118
Child lock 122
Child safety
Instrument panels 14
Indicator and warning lamps 16
Indicators 26
Distance recorders 30
Screen A without audio equipment 31
Screen A with audio equipment 33
Screen C
(PEUGEOT Connect Sound (RD5)) 35
16/9 retractable colour screen
(PEUGEOT Connect Navigation (RT6)) 38
Trip computer 41
Monitoring
Overview
Heating and Ventilation 59
Manual air conditioning 61
Rear screen demist -
defrost 63
Dual-zone digital air conditioning 64
Front seats 67
Rear seats 72
Mirrors 74
Steering wheel adjustment 76
Comfort
Remote control key 45
Alarm 50
Electric windows 52
Doors 54
Boot 57
Lower tailgate 58
Access
Lighting controls 77
Daytime running lamps 81
Automatic illumination of headlamps 82
Headlamp beam adjustment 84
Directional lighting 85
Wiper controls 86
Automatic rain sensitive wipers 89
Courtesy lamps 91
Interior mood lighting 92
Visibility
Eco-driving
.
Contents
3008_en_Chap00a_sommaire_ed01-2015
Direction indicators 123
Hazard warning lamps 123
Horn 123
ESC system 124
Grip control 127
Front seat belts 129
Airbags 132
Safety
Driving recommendations 136
Starting-switching off the engine 137
Electric parking brake 140
Hill start assist 144
Head-up display 147
Distance alert 149
Speed limiter 152
Cruise control 155
Manual gearbox 158
Electronic gearbox 159
Automatic gearbox 164
Gear efciency indicator 168
Stop & Start 169
Tyre under-ination detection 172
Parking sensors 174
Reversing camera 176
Parking space sensors 177
Driving
Emergency or assistance 252
PEUGEOT Connect Navigation (RT6) 255
PEUGEOT Connect Sound (RD5) 311
Audio equipment and telematics
Alphabetical index
Fuel tank 180
Misfuel prevention (Diesel) 183
Running out of fuel (Diesel) 184
Opening the bonnet 185
Underbonnet - petrol engines 186
Underbonnet - Diesel engines 187
Checking levels 188
Checks 191
AdBlue
®
additive and SCR system
(BlueHDi Diesel) 193
Checks
Tool kit 201
Temporary puncture
repair kit 203
Changing a wheel 209
Snow chains 214
Changing a bulb 215
Changing a fuse 221
12 V battery 228
Energy economy mode 231
Changing a wiper blade 232
Towing the vehicle 232
Towbar with quickly detachable
towball 234
Towing a trailer 236
Fitting roof bars 238
Very cold climate screen 239
Accessories 240
Practical information
Petrol engines 242
Petrol weights 243
Diesel engines 245
Diesel weights 247
Dimensions 250
Identication markings 251
Technical data
Overview
4
3008_en_Chap00b_vue-ensemble_ed01-2015
Exterior
Remote control key 45-49
- unlocking/ locking
- locating the vehicle
- battery
Wiper 86-90
Changing a wiper blade 90, 232
Demisting-defrosting the rear
screen 63
Boot, tailgate 57-58
- opening / closing
- emergency release
Temporary puncture
repair kit 203-208
Changing a wheel 209-213
- tools
- removing
Parking sensors 174-175
Reversing camera 176
Parking space sensors 177-178
Quickly detachable towball 234-235
Towbar 236-237
Towing 232-233
Changing bulbs 218-220
- rear lamps
- 3rd brake lamp
- number plate lamps
- foglamps
Fuel tank 180-182
Misfuel prevention 183
Accessories 240-241
Roof bars 238
Panoramic sunroof 101-102
Door mirrors 74
Exterior welcome lighting 83
Door mirror spotlamps 92
Exterior lighting (automatic,
directional) 77-85
Headlamp beam height adjustment 84
Changing front bulbs 215-217
- front lamps
- foglamps
- direction indicator repeaters
Very cold climate screen 239
Doors 54-56
- opening / closing
- central locking
- emergency control
Alarm 50-51
Electric windows 52-53
ESC: ABS, EBFD, EBA, ASR,
CDS 124-126
Grip control 127-128
Tyre under-inflation
detection 172-173
Tyre pressures 172, 208, 251
Snow chains 214
.Overview
5
3008_en_Chap00b_vue-ensemble_ed01-2015
Interior
Storage compartments under
the footwells 100
Rear seats 72-73
Side blinds 108
Temporary puncture
repair kit 203-208
Spare wheel 209-213
Tool kit 201-202
Access to the AdBlue
®
tank 198-200
Conventional child seats 109-117
ISOFIX child seats 118-121
Child lock 122
Rear armrest 100
Ski flap 100
Adjustable boot floor 107
Boot fittings 103-106
- load space space cover
- hooks
- 12 V accessory socket
- luggage retaining net
- storage box
Boot lamp 93
Rear multimedia 98-99
Seat belts 129-131
Mats 97
Airbags 132-135
Deactivating the passenger's front
airbag 111, 133
Front seats 67-71
- manual
- electric
- head restraints
- lumbar
- heated
Seat in table position, transporting long
objects 71
Overview
6
3008_en_Chap00b_vue-ensemble_ed01-2015
Instruments and controls
Sun visor 95
Dashboard fuses 221-224
Opening the bonnet 185
Electric parking
brake 140-143, 145-146
6-speed manual gearbox 158
Electronic gearbox 159-163
Automatic gearbox 164-167
Stop & Start 169-171
Hill start assist 144-146
Eco-driving 12-13
Front armrest 96
Peugeot Connect USB 96, 292, 318
Courtesy lamps 91
Seat belt / passenger's front airbag
warning lamps display 130, 133
Rear view mirror 75
Peugeot Connect
Navigation (RT6) 255-309
Setting the date/time 39
Peugeot Connect Sound
(RD5) 311-331
Setting the date/time 37
Ventilation 59-60
Manual air conditioning 61-62
Digital air conditioning 64-66
Demisting-defrosting the rear
screen 63
Interior fittings 94-95, 97
- glove box
- driver's storage compartments
- mat
12 V accessory socket 97
.Overview
7
3008_en_Chap00b_vue-ensemble_ed01-2015
Instruments and controls (cont.)
Head-up display 147-148
Distance alert 149-151
Lighting controls 77-82
Direction indicators 123
Speed limiter 152-154
Cruise control 155-157
Door mirrors 74
Electric windows, deactivating 52-53
Side switch panel 8
Stop & Start 169-171
Headlamp beam height adjustment 84
Multifunction screens 31-39
- Screen A
- Screen C
- 16/9 colour screen
Retractable screen 40
Screen A (setting the date/time) 31-34
Wiper controls 86-90
Trip computer 41-44
Centre switch panel 8
Hazard warning lamps 123
Head-up display 147-148
Distance alert 149-151
Ignition switch,
starting-switching off 137-139
Panoramic sunroof 101-102
Grip control 127-128
Steering wheel adjustment 76
Horn 123
Instrument panels, screens 14-15
Warning lamps 16-26
Indicators 26-30
Gear shift indicator 168
Buttons 28, 30
- service indicator / trip
distance recorder
- dashboard lighting dimmer
124-126
169-171
123
55-56
50-51
177-178
Overview
8
3008_en_Chap00b_vue-ensemble_ed01-2015
Switch panel
Side
Version 1
A. ASR/DSC OFF (without "Grip
control").
B. Volumetric alarm.
C. Parking space measurement.
The illumination of the indicator lamp shows the
state of the corresponding function.
Centre
D. Stop & Start.
E. Hazard warning lamps.
F. Central locking.
.
124-126
50-51
177-178
169-171
147-148
123
101-102
174-175
55-56
Overview
9
3008_en_Chap00b_vue-ensemble_ed01-2015
Version 2
Side
Centre
A. ASR/DSC OFF
(without "Grip control").
B. Volumetric alarm.
C. Parking space measurement.
D. Stop & Start.
E. Head-up display.
F. Hazard warning lamps.
G. Blind.
H. Visual and audible parking
assistance.
I. Central locking.
The illumination of the indicator lamp shows the
state of the corresponding function.
174-175
124-126
50-51
177-178
169-171
147-148
123
149-151
55-56
Overview
10
3008_en_Chap00b_vue-ensemble_ed01-2015
Version 3
Side
Centre
A. Visual and audible parking
assistance.
B. ASR/DSC OFF
(without "Grip control").
C. Volumetric alarm.
D. Parking space measurement.
E. Stop & Start.
F. Head-up display.
G. Hazard warning lamps.
H. Distance alert.
I. Central locking.
The illumination of the indicator lamp shows the
state of the corresponding function.
.Overview
11
3008_en_Chap00b_vue-ensemble_ed01-2015
Maintenance - Technical data
AdBlue
®
and SCR system 193-200
Running out of fuel, Diesel 184
Checking levels 188-190
- oil
- brake fluid
- power steering fluid
- coolant
- screenwash/headlamp wash fluid
Changing bulbs 215-220
- front
- rear
Checking components 191-192
- air filter
- passenger compartment filter
- oil filter
- brake pads / discs
Opening the bonnet 185
Under the bonnet, petrol 186
Under the bonnet, Diesel 187
Petrol engines 242
Diesel engines 245-246
Identification markings 251
Dimensions 250
12 V battery 228-230
Load reduction, economy mode 231
Engine compartment
fuses 221, 225-227
Petrol weights 243
Diesel weights 247-248
Diesel LCV weights 249
Eco-driving
12
3008_en_Chap00c_eco-conduite_ed01-2015
Eco-driving
Eco-driving is a range of everyday practices that allow the motorist to optimise their fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions.
Optimise the use of your gearbox
With a manual gearbox, move off gently and change up without waiting.
During acceleration change up early.
With an automatic or electronic gearbox, give preference to automatic
mode and avoid pressing the accelerator pedal heavily or suddenly.
The gear shift indicator invites you engage the most suitable gear: as
soon as the indication is displayed in the instrument panel, follow it
straight away.
For vehicles fitted with an electronic or automatic gearbox, this
indicator appears only in manual mode.
Drive smoothly
Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, use engine braking rather
than the brake pedal, and press the accelerator progressively. These
practices contribute towards a reduction in fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions and also helps reduce the background traffic noise.
If your vehicle has cruise control, make use of the system at speeds
above 25 mph (40 km/h) when the traffic is flowing well.
Control the use of your electrical
equipment
Before moving off, if the passenger compartment is too warm, ventilate it
by opening the windows and air vents before using the air conditioning.
Above 30 mph (50 km/h), close the windows and leave the air vents
open.
Remember to make use of equipment that can help keep the
temperature in the passenger compartment down (sunroof and window
blinds...).
Switch off the air conditioning, unless it has automatic regulation, as
soon as the desired temperature is attained.
Switch off the demisting and defrosting controls, if not automatic.
Switch off the heated seat as soon as possible.
Switch off the headlamps and front foglamps when the level of light
does not require their use.
Avoid running the engine before moving off, particularly in winter; your
vehicle will warm up much faster while driving.
As a passenger, if you avoid connecting your multimedia devices
(film, music, video game...), you will contribute towards limiting the
consumption of electrical energy, and so of fuel.
Disconnect your portable devices before leaving the vehicle.
.Eco-driving
13
3008_en_Chap00c_eco-conduite_ed01-2015
Limit the causes of excess consumption
Spread loads throughout the vehicle; place the heaviest items in the
bottom of the boot, as close as possible to the rear seats.
Limit the loads carried in the vehicle and reduce wind resistance (roof
bars, roof rack, bicycle carrier, trailer...). Use a roof box in preference.
Remove roof bars and roof racks after use.
At the end of winter, remove snow tyres and refit your summer tyres.
Observe the recommendations on
maintenance
Check the tyre pressures regularly, when cold, referring to the label in
the door aperture, driver's side.
Carry out this check in particular:
- before a long journey,
- at each change of season,
- after a long period out of use.
Don't forget the spare wheel and the tyres on any trailer or caravan.
Have your vehicle serviced regularly (engine oil, oil filter, air filter,
passenger compartment filter...) and observe the schedule of
operations recommended in the manufacturer's service schedule.
With a BlueHDi Diesel engine, if the SCR system is faulty your vehicle
becomes polluting; go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop
without delay to have the emissions of nitrous oxides brought back to
the legal level.
When refuelling, do not continue after the third cut-off of the nozzle to
avoid any overflow.
At the wheel of your new vehicle, it is only after the first 1 800 miles
(3 000 kilometres) that you will see the fuel consumption settle down to
a consistent average.
Monitoring
14
3008_en_Chap01_controle-marche_ed01-2015
Instrument panels
Panel grouping together the vehicle operation indication dials and warning lamps.
Dials
1. Rev counter.
Indicates the engine speed (x 1 000 rpm).
2. Coolant temperature.
Indicates the temperature of the engine
coolant (° Celsius).
3. Fuel gauge.
Indicates the quantity of fuel remaining in
the tank.
4. Speedometer.
Indicates the current speed of the moving
vehicle (mph or km/h).
5. Screen.
6. Control switch.
Temporary display of the service indicator
and driving range with the AdBlue
®
additive.
Display and reset the selected function (trip
distance recorder or service indicator).
7. Instrument panel lighting dimmer.
Adjusts the brightness of the lighting of
the instruments and controls, if the vehicle
lighting is on.
For more information, refer to the
section corresponding to the button or
function and its associated display.
1
Monitoring
15
3008_en_Chap01_controle-marche_ed01-2015
Screen(s)
A. Speed limiter
or
Cruise control.
(mph or km/h)
B. Trip distance recorder.
(miles or km)
C. Service indicator.
(miles or km) or,
Engine oil level indicator (depending on
version).
or
distance recorder.
(miles or km)
D. Gear shift indicator.
Electronic or automatic gearbox.
E. Warning messages and function
status messages, trip computer,
GPS navigation information.
Monitoring
16
3008_en_Chap01_controle-marche_ed01-2015
Indicator and warning lamps
When the ignition is switched on
Certain warning lamps come on for a
few seconds when the vehicle's ignition is
switched on.
When the engine is started, these same
warning lamps should go off.
If they remain on, before moving off, refer to the
information on the warning lamp concerned.
Associated warnings
The illumination of certain warning lamps may
be accompanied by an audible signal and a
message in the multifunction screen.
Visual indicators informing the driver that a system is in operation (operation or deactivation indicator lamps) or of the occurrence of a fault (warning
lamp).
The warning lamps may come on
continuously (fixed) or flash.
Certain warning lamps may come on
in one of two different modes. Only by
relating the type of illumination to the
operating status of the vehicle can it
be ascertained whether the situation is
normal or whether a fault has occurred.
Operation indicator lamps
If one of the following indicator lamps comes on, this confirms that the corresponding system has come into operation.
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
Left-hand
direction indicator
flashing with buzzer. The lighting stalk is pushed down.
Right-hand
direction indicator
flashing with buzzer. The lighting stalk is pushed up.
Sidelamps fixed. The lighting stalk is in the
"Sidelamps" position.
Dipped beam
headlamps
fixed. The lighting stalk is in the "Dipped
beam headlamps" position.
Main beam
headlamps
fixed. The lighting stalk is pulled towards
you.
Pull the stalk to return to dipped beam headlamps.
1
Monitoring
17
3008_en_Chap01_controle-marche_ed01-2015
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
Electric parking
brake
fixed. The electric parking brake is applied.
Release the electric parking brake to switch off the
warning lamp: with your foot on the brake pedal, pull
the electric parking brake control lever.
Observe the safety recommendations.
For more information on the electric parking brake,
refer to the corresponding section.
Deactivation of
the automatic
functions of the
electric parking
brake
fixed. The "automatic application"
(on switching off the engine) and
"automatic release" functions are
deactivated or faulty.
Activate the function (depending on the country of
sale) via the vehicle configuration menu or contact a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop if automatic
application / release is not possible.
For more information on the electric parking brake,
refer to the corresponding section.
Diesel engine
pre-heating
fixed. The ignition switch is at the
2nd position (ignition on).
Wait until the warning lamp has switched off before starting.
The duration for which the warning lamp is on is
determined by the climatic conditions.
Front foglamps fixed. The front foglamps are switched on
using the ring on the lighting control
stalk.
Turn the ring on the lighting control stalk rearward
twice to switch off the front foglamps.
Rear foglamps fixed. The rear foglamps are on. Turn the ring on the stalk rearward to switch off the
rear foglamps.
Monitoring
18
3008_en_Chap01_controle-marche_ed01-2015
Foot on the
brake pedal
fixed. The brake pedal is not pressed. You must press the brake pedal firmly to:.
- start the engine with an electronic gearbox (lever
in position N),
- manually release the parking brake.
flashing.
With an electronic gearbox, if you
hold the vehicle on an incline using
the accelerator for too long, the
clutch overheats.
Use the brake pedal and/or the electric parking brake.
Parking space
sensors
fixed. The parking space sensors function
is active.
Press the corresponding button to deactivate it.
flashing. The system is measuring the space. Once the measurement has been done, the warning
lamp comes on fixed again.
Stop & Start fixed.
When the vehicle stops (red lights,
traffic jams, ...) the Stop & Start
system has put the engine into STOP
mode.
The warning lamp goes off and the engine restarts
automatically in START mode, as soon as you want to
move off.
flashes for a few
seconds, then goes
off.
STOP mode is temporarily
unavailable.
or
START mode is invoked
automatically.
For more information on Stop & Start, refer to the
corresponding section.
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
1
Monitoring
19
3008_en_Chap01_controle-marche_ed01-2015
Deactivation indicator lamps
If one of the following indicator lamps comes on, this confirms that the corresponding system has been switched off intentionally.
This is may be accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the multifunction screen.
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
Passenger's
airbag system
fixed. The control, located in the glove box,
is set to the OFF position.
The passenger's front airbag is
deactivated.
You can install a rearward facing
child seat, unless there is a fault with
the operation of the airbags (Airbag
warning lamp on).
Set the control to the ON position to activate the
passenger's front airbag.
In this case, do not fit a child seat in the rearward
facing position.
Warning lamps
When the engine is running or the vehicle is being driven, the illumination of one of the following warning lamps indicates a fault which requires action
on the part of the driver.
Any fault resulting in the illumination of a warning lamp must be investigated further by reading the associated message in the multifunction screen.
If you encounter any problems, do not hesitate to contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
STOP fixed, alone or
associated with
another warning lamp,
accompanied by an
audible signal and a
message in the screen.
Illumination of this warning lamp is
associated with a serious fault with
the braking system, power steering,
engine lubrication system or cooling
system.
Stop as soon as it is safe to do so as there is a risk
that the engine will cut out while driving.
Park, switch off the ignition and contact a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Monitoring
20
3008_en_Chap01_controle-marche_ed01-2015
Service temporarily,
accompanied by a
message.
One or more minor faults for which
there is no specific warning lamp
have been detected.
Identify the cause of the fault using the message
displayed in the screen.
You can deal with some problems yourself, such as a
door open or the start of saturation of the particle filter
(as soon as the traffic conditions allow, regenerate
the filter by driving at a speed of at least 40 mph
(60 km/h), until the warning lamp goes off).
For any other problems, such as a fault with the tyre
under inflation detection system, contact a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
fixed, accompanied by
a message.
One or more major faults for which
there is no specific warning lamp
have been detected.
Identify the cause of the fault using the message
displayed in the screen; you must then contact a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
fixed, associated
with the flashing and
then fixed display of
the service indicator
spanner.
The servicing interval has been
exceeded.
Only on BlueHDi Diesel versions.
Your vehicle must be serviced as soon as possible.
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
1
Monitoring
21
3008_en_Chap01_controle-marche_ed01-2015
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
Electric parking
brake
flashing. The electric parking brake is not
applied automatically.
The application/release is faulty.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Park on flat level ground, engage a gear (or place the
lever in position P for an automatic gearbox), switch
off the ignition and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Electric parking
brake fault
fixed. The electric parking brake has a fault.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop
without delay.
For more information on the electric parking brake,
refer to the corresponding section.
Braking fixed, associated with
the STOP warning
lamp.
The braking system fluid level has
dropped significantly.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Top up with brake fluid recommended by PEUGEOT.
If the problem persists, have the system checked by a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
+
fixed, associated with the
electric parking brake
malfunction warning
lamp, if the parking brake
is released.
The braking system has a fault. You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Park, switch off the ignition and contact a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
+ fixed, associated with
the STOP and ABS
warning lamps.
The electronic brake force distribution
(EBFD) system has a fault.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Anti-lock
Braking System
(ABS)
fixed. The anti-lock braking system has a
fault.
The vehicle retains conventional braking.
Drive carefully at reduced speed and contact a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop without
delay.
Monitoring
22
3008_en_Chap01_controle-marche_ed01-2015
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
Engine
autodiagnosis
system
flashing. The engine management system has
a fault.
Risk of destruction of the catalytic converter.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
fixed. The emission control system has a
fault.
The warning lamp should go off when the engine is started.
If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or qualified
workshop without delay.
Low fuel level fixed with the needle
in the red zone.
When it first comes on there remains
approximately 6 litres of fuel in the
tank.
At this point, you begin to use the fuel
reserve.
Refuel as soon as possible to avoid running out of fuel.
This warning lamp will come on every time the ignition
is switched on, until a sufficient addition of fuel is made.
Fuel tank capacity: approximately 60 litres.
Never continue to drive until you run out of fuel, as
this could damage the emission control and injection
systems.
Maximum coolant
temperature
fixed with the needle
in the red zone.
The temperature of the cooling
system is too high.
Stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Wait until the engine has cooled down before topping
up the level, if necessary.
If the problem persists, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or
a qualified workshop.
Engine oil
pressure
fixed. There is a fault with the engine
lubrication system.
You must stop as soon it is safe to do so.
Park, switch off the ignition and contact a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Dynamic
stability control
(DSC/ASR)
flashing. The DSC/ASR regulation is
operating.
The system optimises traction and improves the
directional stability of the vehicle in the event of loss of
grip or trajectory.
fixed. The DSC/ASR system has a fault. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
1
Monitoring
23
3008_en_Chap01_controle-marche_ed01-2015
AdBlue
®
additive
(BlueHDi Diesel)
fixed, on switching
on the ignition,
accompanied by an
audible signal and a
message indicating
the remaining driving
range.
The remaining driving range is
between 350 miles (600 km) and
1500 miles (2400 km).
Have the AdBlue
®
additive tank topped up as soon
as possible: go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop, or carry out this operation yourself.
+ flashing associated
with the SERVICE
warning lamp,
accompanied by an
audible signal and a
message indicating
the remaining driving
range.
The remaining driving range is
between 0 and 350 miles (600 km).
You must top-up the AdBlue
®
additive tank to avoid
a breakdown: go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop, or carry out this operation yourself.
flashing, associated
with the SERVICE
warning lamp,
accompanied by an
audible signal and a
message indicating
that starting is
prevented.
The AdBlue
®
tank is empty: the
starting inhibition system required
by legislation prevents starting of the
engine.
To be able to start the engine, you must top-up the
AdBlue
®
additive tank: go to a PEUGEOT dealer
or a qualified workshop, or carry out this operation
yourself.
It is essential to add at least 3.8 litres of AdBlue
®
to
the additive tank.
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
For topping-up or for more information on the AdBlue
®
additive, refer to the corresponding section.
Monitoring
24
3008_en_Chap01_controle-marche_ed01-2015
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
+
+
SCR emissions
control system
(BlueHDi Diesel)
fixed, on switching on the
ignition, associated with
the SERVICE and engine
diagnostic warning lamps,
accompanied by an audible
signal and a message.
A fault with the SCR
emissions control system has
been detected.
This alert disappears once the exhaust emissions
return to normal levels.
flashing, on switching on
the ignition, associated with
the SERVICE and engine
diagnostic warning lamps,
accompanied by an audible
signal and a message
indicating the remaining
driving range.
After confirmation of the fault
with the emissions control
system, you can drive for up
to 650 miles (1 100 km) before
the engine starting inhibition
system is triggered.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop
without delay, to avoid a breakdown.
flashing, on switching on
the ignition, associated with
the SERVICE and engine
diagnostic warning lamps,
accompanied by an audible
signal and a message.
You have exceeded the
authorised driving limit
following confirmation of
a fault with the emissions
control system: the engine
starting inhibition system
prevents starting of the
engine.
To be able to start the engine, you must call on a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
1
Monitoring
25
3008_en_Chap01_controle-marche_ed01-2015
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
Battery charge* fixed. The battery charging circuit has a
fault (dirty or loose terminals, slack or
cut alternator belt, ...).
The warning lamp should go off when the engine is
started.
If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Door(s) open fixed if the speed is
below 6 mph (10 km/h).
A door, the boot, the lower tailgate
or the bonnet (with alarm only) is still
open.
Close the door or boot.
fixed and accompanied
by an audible signal
if the speed is above
6 mph (10 km/h).
Seat belt not
fastened /
unfastened
fixed then flashing
accompanied by an
increasing audible
signal.
The driver and/or the front passenger
has not fastened or has unfastened
their seat belt.
Pull the strap then insert the tongue in the buckle.
Airbags temporarily. This lamp comes on for a
few seconds when you turn on the
ignition, then goes off.
This lamp should go off when the engine is started.
If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
fixed. One of the airbag or seat belt
pretensioner systems has a fault.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Water in Diesel fixed. The Diesel fuel filter contains water. Risk of damage to the injection system on Diesel
engines.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop
without delay.
* Depending on the country of sale.
Monitoring
26
3008_en_Chap01_controle-marche_ed01-2015
Coolant temperature gauge
With the engine running, when the needle is:
- in zone A, the temperature is correct,
- in zone B, the temperature is too high;
the max temperature warning lamp 1 and
the central STOP warning lamp come on,
accompanied by an audible signal and a
message in the screen.
After driving for a few minutes, the temperature
and pressure in the cooling system increase.
To top up the level:
F wait for the engine to cool,
F unscrew the cap by two turns to allow the
pressure to drop,
F when the pressure has dropped, remove
the cap,
F top up the level to the "MAX" mark.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Wait a few minutes before switching off the
engine.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
Directional
headlamps
flashing. The directional headlamps system
has a fault.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Under-inflation fixed. The pressure in one or more wheels
is too low.
Check the pressure of the tyres as soon as possible.
This check should preferably be carried out when the
tyres are cold.
+ flashing then fixed,
accompanied by the
Service warning lamp.
The tyre pressure monitoring system
has a fault or no sensor is detected
on one of the wheels.
Under-inflation detection is not assured.
Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
1
Monitoring
27
3008_en_Chap01_controle-marche_ed01-2015
Service indicator
Between 600 miles (1 000 km)
and 1 800 miles (3 000 km) remain
before the next service is due
For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the
spanner symbolising the service operations comes
on. The distance recorder display line indicates the
distance remaining before the next service is due.
Example: 1 700 miles (2 800 km) remain before
the next service is due.
For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the
screen indicates:
5 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
the spanner goes off; the distance recorder
resumes its normal operation. The screen then
indicates the total and trip distances.
Less than 600 miles (1 000 km)
remain before the next service is due
Example: 560 miles (900 km) remain before
the next service is due.
For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
the screen indicates:
5 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
the distance recorder resumes its normal
operation. The spanner remains on to
indicate that a service must be carried out
soon.
More than 1 800 miles (3 000 km)
remain before the next service is due
When the ignition is switched on, no service
information appears in the screen.
System which informs the driver when the
next service is due, in accordance with the
manufacturer's servicing schedule.
The point at which the service is due is
calculated from the last indicator zero reset,
according to the mileage covered since the last
service.
For BlueHDi Diesel versions, depending on the
country of sale, the level of deterioration of the
engine oil may also be taken into account.
Monitoring
28
3008_en_Chap01_controle-marche_ed01-2015
Resetting the service indicator
After each service, the service indicator must
be reset to zero.
Service overdue
5 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
the distance recorder resumes its normal
operation. The spanner remains on.
Retrieving the service
information
You can access the service information at any
time.
F Press the trip distance recorder zero reset
button.
The service information is displayed for a
few seconds, then disappears.
If you have to disconnect the battery
following this operation, lock the vehicle
and wait at least five minutes for the
reset to be registered.
If you have carried out the service on your
vehicle yourself:
F switch off the ignition,
F press and hold the trip distance recorder
zero reset button,
F switch on the ignition; the distance recorder
display begins a countdown,
F when the display indicates "=0", release
the button; the spanner disappears.
For BlueHDi versions, the spanner may
also come on early, according to the
level of deterioration of the engine oil,
which depends on the driving conditions
in which the vehicle is used.
With BlueHDi Diesel versions, the
Service warning lamp also comes on
when the ignition is switched on.
For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
the screen indicates:
For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
the spanner flashes to indicate that the service
must be carried out as soon as possible.
Example: the service is overdue by 186 miles
(300 km).
1
Monitoring
29
3008_en_Chap01_controle-marche_ed01-2015
Engine oil level indicator*
Oil level correct
Oil level low
Oil level indicator fault
In the event of a fault with the electric indicator,
the engine oil level is no longer monitored.
When the system has a fault, you should check
the engine oil level using the manual dipstick
(located under the bonnet).
This is signalled by the flashing of "OIL", or the
display of a message "Oil level incorrect" in the
instrument panel, accompanied by illumination
of the service warning lamp and an audible
signal.
If the low oil level is confirmed by a check using
the dipstick, the level must be topped up to
prevent damage to the engine.
Refer to the "Checking levels" section.
This is signalled by the flashing of "OIL--" or the
display of a message "Oil level measurement
invalid" in the instrument panel. Contact a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
On versions fitted with an electric oil level
indicator, the state of the engine oil level
is displayed in the instrument panel for a
few seconds when the ignition is switched on,
after the service information.
The level shown will only be correct
if the vehicle is on level ground and
the engine has been off for more than
30 minutes.
* Depending on version.
Refer to the "Checking levels" section.
Monitoring
30
3008_en_Chap01_controle-marche_ed01-2015
Total distance recorder
It measures the total distance travelled by the
vehicle since its first registration.
Lighting dimmer
System for manual adjustment of the
brightness of the instrument panel in relation to
the exterior brightness.
Operation
When the vehicle lighting is on:
F press the button to change the brightness
of the instrument panel,
F when the lighting reaches the minimum
setting, release the button, then press
again to increase it,
or
F when the lighting reaches the maximum
setting, release the button, then press
again to reduce it,
F when the lighting reaches the level of
brightness required, release the button.
Dimmer deactivated
When the lighting is off, or in day mode on
vehicles fitted with daytime running lamps,
pressing the button does not have any effect.
Trip distance recorder
It measures the distance travelled since it was
reset to zero by the driver.
When the vehicle lighting is on, you
cannot switch the instrument panel
lighting off but you can adjust it to
minimum.
F With the ignition on, press the button until
zeros appear.
Distance recorders
The total and trip distances are displayed for
thirty seconds when the ignition is switched off,
when the driver's door is opened and when the
vehicle is locked or unlocked.
When travelling abroad, you may
have to change the units of distance:
the display of road speed must be in
the official units (miles or km) for the
country. The change of units is done via
the screen configuration menu, with the
vehicle stationary.
1
Monitoring
31
3008_en_Chap01_controle-marche_ed01-2015
This displays the following information:
- time,
- date,
- ambient temperature* (this flashes if there
is a risk of ice),
- alert messages,
- trip computer (refer to the end of the
section).
Warning messages (e.g.: "Emission control
system faulty") or information messages
(e.g.: "Boot open") may appear temporarily.
Some can be cleared by pressing the "ESC"
button.
Monochrome screen A (without audio equipment)
Controls Main menu
There are three display control buttons:
- "ESC" to abandon the operation in
progress,
- "MENU" to scroll through the menus or
sub-menus,
- "OK" to select the menu or sub-menu
required.
F Press the "MENU" button to scroll through
the various menus of the main menu:
- vehicle configuration,
- options,
- display settings,
- languages,
- units.
F Press the "OK" button to select the menu
required.
Displays in the screen
* With air conditioning only.
Monitoring
32
3008_en_Chap01_controle-marche_ed01-2015
Vehicle conguration
Options
Once the "Options" menu has been selected,
you can start diagnostics of the status of the
equipment (active, not active, faulty).
Languages
Once the "Languages" menu has been
selected, you can change the language used
by the display (Français, Italiano, Nederlands,
Portugues, Portugues-Brasil, Türkçe, Deutsch,
English, Espanol).
Date and time
Once the "Display settings" menu has been selected,
you can gain access to the following settings:
- year,
- month,
- day,
- hour,
- minutes,
- 12 or 24 hour mode.
Units
Once the "Units" menu has been selected, you
can change the units for:
- temperature (°C or °F),
- fuel consumption (l/100 km, mpg or km/l).
F Once you have selected a setting, press
the "OK" button to change its value.
F Wait for approximately ten seconds without
any action to allow the changed data to
be recorded or press the "ESC" button to
cancel.
The screen then returns to the normal display.
Once the "Vehicle configuration" menu has
been selected, you can activate or deactivate
the following equipment:
- wiper linked with reverse gear (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- selective unlocking (refer to the "Access"
section),
- "guide-me-home" lighting (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- directional headlamps (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- automatic parking brake** (refer to the
"Driving" section),
- parking space sensors (refer to the
"Driving" section),
- ...
As a safety measure, configuration of
the multifunction screen by the driver
must only be done when stationary.
** Depending on the country of sale.
1
Monitoring
33
3008_en_Chap01_controle-marche_ed01-2015
Monochrome screen A (with audio equipment)
Controls
This displays the following information:
- time,
- date,
- ambient temperature* (this flashes if there
is a risk of ice),
- alert messages,
- audio sources (radio, CD, ...),
- trip computer (refer to the corresponding
section).
Warning messages (e.g.: "Emission control
system faulty") or information messages
(e.g.: "Boot open") may appear temporarily.
Some can be cleared by pressing the
"
<
] arrow" button.
Main menu
F Press the "MENU" button for access to
the main menu, then press the "5" or
"6" buttons to scroll through the various
menus:
- radio-CD,
- vehicle configuration,
- options,
- display settings,
- languages,
- units.
F Press the "OK" button to select the menu
required.
From the audio equipment control panel, you
can:
F press the "MENU" button to gain access to
the main menu,
F press the "5" or "6" buttons to scroll
through the items on the screen,
F press the "MODE" button to change the
permanent application (trip computer,
audio source, ...),
F press the "7" or "8" buttons to change a
setting value,
F press the "OK" button to confirm,
or
Radio-CD
With the audio equipment switched on, once
the "Radio-CD" menu has been selected you
can activate or deactivate the functions linked
with use of the radio (RDS, REG), the CD or the
CD changer (introscan, shuffle, CD repeat).
* With air conditioning only.
F press this button to abandon the
operation in progress.
For more information on the "Radio-
CD" application, refer to the "Audio
equipment and telematics" section.
Displays in the screen
Monitoring
34
3008_en_Chap01_controle-marche_ed01-2015
Date and time Languages
Once the "Languages" menu has been
selected, you can change the language used
by the display.
Units
Once the "Units" menu has been selected,
you can change the units of the following
parameters:
- temperature (°C or °F),
- fuel consumption (l/100 km, mpg or km/l).
F Once you have selected a setting, press
the "7" or "8" buttons to change its value.
F Press the "5" or "6" buttons to switch
respectively to the previous or next setting.
F Press the "OK" button to record the
change and return to the normal display or
press the "
<
] arrow" button to cancel.
Vehicle conguration
Once the "Vehicle Configuration" menu has
been selected, you can activate or deactivate
the following equipment:
- wiper linked with reverse gear (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- selective unlocking (refer to the "Access"
section),
- guide-me-home lighting (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- directional headlamps (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- automatic parking brake** (refer to the
"Driving" section),
- ...
Options
Once the "Options" menu has been selected,
you can start diagnostics of the status of the
equipment (active, not active, faulty).
As a safety measure, configuration of
the multifunction screen by the driver
must only be done when stationary.
Once the "DATE AND TIME" menu has been
selected, you can gain access to the following
settings:
- year,
- month,
- day,
- hour,
- minutes,
- 12 or 24 hour mode.
** Depending on the country of sale.
1
Monitoring
35
3008_en_Chap01_controle-marche_ed01-2015
Monochrome screen C (with PEUGEOT Connect Sound (RD5))
Main menu
Displays according to context:
- time,
- date,
- ambient temperature with air conditioning
(the value displayed flashes if there is a
risk of ice),
- audio functions,
- trip computer (see the corresponding
section),
- alert messages,
- screen and vehicle equipment parameter
setting menus.
"Audio functions" menu
Controls
From the audio equipment control panel, you
can:
F press the "MENU" button for access to the
main menu,
F press the "5" or "6" buttons to scroll
through the items on the screen,
F press the "MODE" button to change the
permanent application (trip computer,
audio source...),
F press the "7" or "8" buttons to change a
setting value,
F press the "OK" button to confirm,
or
F Press the "MENU" button for access to the
main menu:
- audio functions,
- trip computer (see the corresponding
section),
- personalisation-configuration,
- telephone (Bluetooth system).
F Press the"5" or "6" button to select the
menu required, then confirm by pressing
the "OK" button.
With the audio equipment switched on, once
this menu has been selected you can activate
or deactivate the functions linked with use
of the radio (RDS, REG, RadioText) or CD
(introscan, shuffle, CD repeat).
F press this button to abandon the
operation in progress.
For more information on the "Audio
functions" application, refer to the
PEUGEOT Connect Sound (RD5) section.
Displays in the screen
Monitoring
36
3008_en_Chap01_controle-marche_ed01-2015
"Trip computer" menu
F Press the "MENU" button to gain access
to the general menu.
F Press the arrows, then the "OK" button to
select the "Trip computer" menu.
F In the "Trip computer" menu, select one
of the applications.
This allows you to enter an approximate value
for the distance to the final destination.
Once this menu has been selected, you can
consult information concerning the status of the
vehicle (alert log, status of the functions...).
Dene the vehicle parameters
Once this menu has been selected, you can
activate or deactivate the following equipment:
- wiper linked with reverse gear (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- selective unlocking (refer to the "Access"
section),
- guide-me-home lighting (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- directional headlamps (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- automatic parking brake* (refer to the
"Driving" section),
- ...
"Personalisation-
Configuration" menu
Once this menu has been selected, you can
gain access to the following functions:
- define the vehicle parameters,
- display configuration,
- choice of language.
Alert log
This summarises the active warning messages,
displaying them in succession in the
multifunction screen
Status of functions
This summarises the status of the functions
present on the vehicle.
Enter the distance to the
destination
* Depending on the country of sale.
1
Monitoring
37
3008_en_Chap01_controle-marche_ed01-2015
Display conguration
Once this menu has been selected, you have
access to the following settings:
- brightness-video setting,
- date and time setting,
- selection of the units.
Adjusting the date and time
F Press the "7" or "8" button to select the
"Display configuration" menu, then the
"OK" button.
F Press the "5" or "6" button, to select the
"Adjust date and time" line, then on the
"OK" button.
F Press the "7" or "8" button to select the
setting to modify. Confirm by pressing the
"OK" button then adjust the setting and
confirm again to save the modification.
Example: setting of the duration of the guide-
me-home lighting.
F Press the "5" or "6" buttons, then the
"OK" button to select the menu required.
F Press the "5" or "6" buttons, then the
"OK" button to select the "Guide-me-home
headlamps" line.
F Press the "7" or "8" buttons to set the
value required (15, 30 or 60 seconds), then
press the "OK" button to confirm.
F Press the "5" or "6" buttons, then the "OK"
button to select the "OK" box and confirm
or press the "
<
] arrow" button to cancel.
"Telephone" menu
With the audio equipment switched on, once
this menu has been selected you can configure
your Bluetooth hands-free kit (pairing), consult
the various telephone directories (calls log,
services...) and manage your communications
(accept call, end call, call on hold, secret
mode...).
For more information on the telephone
application, refer to the PEUGEOT
Connect Sound (RD5) section.
As a safety measure, configuration of
the multifunction screen by the driver
must only be done when stationary.
Choice of language
Once this menu has been selected, you can
change the screen display language.
F Adjust the settings one by one, confirming
with the "OK" button.
F Press the "5" or "6" button, then the
"OK" button to select the "OK" box and
confirm, or the "Back" button to cancel.
Monitoring
38
3008_en_Chap01_controle-marche_ed01-2015
16/9 retractable colour screen (PEUGEOT Connect Navigation (RT6))
* For more information on these applications,
refer to the "Audio equipment and telematics"
section.
Displays in the screen
Depending on the context, it displays the
following information:
- time,
- date,
- altitude,
- ambient temperature (the value displayed
flashes if there is a risk of ice),
- parking sensor information,
- parking space measurement,
- audio functions,
- directory and telephone information,
- satellite navigation system information,
- settings menus for the screen, the satellite
navigation system and vehicle systems.
- the image from the reversing camera.
Controls
From the navigation system control panel, to
select one of the applications:
F press the dedicated "RADIO", "MUSIC",
"NAV", "TRAFFIC", "PHONE" or
"SETUP" button for access to the
corresponding menu,
F turn the dial A to select a function, an item
in a list,
F press button B to confirm the selection,
or
F press the "Back" button to abandon the
current operation and return to the previous
display.
With repeated presses on the C "MODE"
button, the screen displays:
- "RADIO / MEDIA"*,
- "TELEPHONE"*,
- "FULL SCREEN MAP"*,
- "MAP IN A WINDOW"*,
"SETUP" menu
F Press the "SETUP" button to open the
configuration menu:
- "Display configuration",
- "Speech synthesis setting".
- "Select language",
- "Define vehicle parameters",
- "Alert log".
For the operation of the retractable
screen (opening, closing, adjusting the
position...), refer to the "Access to the
retractable screen" section.
As a safety measure, configuration of
the multifunction screen by the driver
must only be done when stationary.
1
Monitoring
39
3008_en_Chap01_controle-marche_ed01-2015
Display conguration
This menu is used to select the colour scheme
for the screen, adjust the brightness, set
the date and time and to choose the units
for distance (km or miles), fuel consumption
(l/100 km, mpg or km/l) and temperature
(°Celsius or °Fahrenheit).
Adjusting the voice synthesiser
This menu is used to adjust the volume setting
for navigation instructions and to choose the
type of voice (male or female).
Choice of language
This menu is used to choose the language
used by the screen from a defined list.
Vehicle parameters
This menu is used to activate or deactivate
certain driving and comfort systems, classified
by category:
- "Driver aid":
● "Electric brake*" (Automatic electric
parking brake; refer to the "Driving"
section),
- "Wiper operation":
● "Rear wiper operates in reverse: ON /
OFF" (rear wiper coupled to reverse
gear; refer to the "Visibility" section),
- "Vehicle access" (refer to the "Access"
section):
● "Plip action: all doors, driver only"
(Selective unlocking of the driver's door),
- "Lighting configuration" (refer to the
"Visibility" section):
● "Duration of guide me home lighting:
OFF / 15 s / 30 s / 60 s" (Automatic
guide me home lighting),
● "Directional headlights: ON / OFF"
(Main / additional directional lighting).
Alert log
This lists the active alerts by displaying in turn
the different messages associated with them.
* Depending on the country of sale.
Adjusting the date and time
- Press on SETUP.
- Select "Display configuration" and confirm.
- Select "Set date and time" and confirm.
Select "Minute adjustment via GPS" so that
the minutes are adjusted automatically by
satellite reception.
- Select the setting to modify. Confirm by
pressing on OK, then modify the setting
and confirm again to save the modification.
- Adjust the settings one by one.
- Select "OK" in the screen then confirm to
save the setting.
Monitoring
40
3008_en_Chap01_controle-marche_ed01-2015
You can adjust the angle of the screen to one of
four defined positions, by repeated presses on
the front or back of the control B. The position
of the screen is memorised on closing.
The screen opens automatically when the
ignition is switched on. It closes automatically
three seconds after switching off the ignition if
the audio and telematics system is switched off.
You can open or close the screen at any time,
with the ignition on, using control A.
- Press button A: the screen folds.
- Press button A again: the screen opens
again.
If you have closed the screen, it will
open again automatically:
- on switching on the audio and
navigation system (unless it had
been closed manually while the
system was in operation),
- when an outgoing telephone call is
made,
- when a voice command is given,
- when a warning message linked
with the STOP warning lamp is
displayed (PEUGEOT Connect
Navigation (RT6)).
Access to the retractable screen
Adjusting the angle of the screen
1
Monitoring
41
3008_en_Chap01_controle-marche_ed01-2015
Trip computer
When the range falls below 20 miles (30 km),
dashes are displayed. After filling with at least
5 litres of fuel, the range is recalculated and is
displayed when it exceeds 60 miles (100 km).
Range
(miles or km)
The distance which can still be
travelled with the fuel remaining in the tank
(related to the average fuel consumption over
the last few miles (kilometres) travelled).
Current fuel consumption
(mpg or l/100 km or km/l)
Calculated over the last few seconds.
Average fuel
consumption
(mpg or l/100 km or km/l)
Calculated since the last trip
reset.
Distance travelled
(miles or km)
Calculated since the last trip
reset.
Average speed
(mph or km/h)
Calculated since the last trip reset.
Stop & Start time counter
(minutes / seconds or hours /
minutes)
If your vehicle is fitted with Stop &
Start, a time counter calculates the time spent
in STOP mode during a journey.
It resets to zero every time the ignition is
switched on with the key.
If dashes are displayed continuously
while driving in place of the digits,
contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
This value may vary following a change
in the style of driving or the relief,
resulting in a significant change in the
current fuel consumption.
This function is only displayed from
20 mph (30 km/h).
A few definitions
Monitoring
42
3008_en_Chap01_controle-marche_ed01-2015
Trip computer
F Press the button, located at the end of the
wiper stalk, to display the various items of
trip computer information in succession.
The trip computer provides the following
information:
System that gives you information on the current journey (range, fuel consumption…).
Monochrome screen A
Information displays
- range,
- current fuel consumption,
- Stop & Start time counter,
- distance travelled,
- average fuel consumption,
Trip reset
F The next press then returns you to the
normal display.
- average speed.
F Press the control for more than
two seconds to reset to zero the distance
travelled, the average fuel consumption
and the average speed.
1
Monitoring
43
3008_en_Chap01_controle-marche_ed01-2015
Monochrome screen C
Trip computer
Instrument panel screen
With instrument panel screen
F Press the button on the end of the wiper
control stalk to display each of the trip
computer tabs in turn.
Information displays
With screen C
F Press the PEUGEOT Connect Sound
(RD5) "MODE" button repeatedly to
display the trip comuter information.
Then, repeatedly press the button on the end of
the wiper control stalk to display each of the
trip computer tabs in turn.
Or
F Press the button on the end of the wiper
control stalk to temporarily display a
window with the trip computer information.
Then, repeatedly press the button on the end of
the wiper control stalk to display each of the
trip computer tabs in turn.
System which provides instantaneous information on the current trip (range, fuel consumption…).
Monitoring
44
3008_en_Chap01_controle-marche_ed01-2015
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
trip computer information appears in the
monochrome C screen or in the instrument
panel screen.
- The current information with:
● the range,
● the current fuel consumption,
● the distance remaining to be travelled or
the Stop & Start time counter.
- The trip "1" tab with:
● the average speed,
for the first trip,
● the average fuel consumption,
- The trip "2" tab with:
● the average speed,
for the second trip,
● the average fuel consumption,
With the C screen or instrument panel
screen
F When the trip required is displayed, press
the control for more than two seconds.
Trips "1" and "2" are independent but their use
is identical.
For example, trip "1" can be used for daily
figures, and trip "2" for monthly figures.
Trip reset
With the instrument panel screen
- A black screen
- A reminder of the navigation instructions
with the PEUGEOT Connect Navigation
(RT6) system.
Press again to return to the current display.
2
Acc ess
45
3008_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2015
Unfolding the key
Unlocking the vehicle
F Press the open padlock to
unlock the vehicle.
Complete unlocking using the
remote control
Remote control key
System which permits central unlocking or locking of the vehicle using the lock or from a distance. It is also used to locate and start the vehicle, as well
as providing protection against theft.
Complete unlocking using the key
F Turn the key forwards in the driver's door
lock to unlock the vehicle.
Selective unlocking using the
remote control
Selective unlocking using the key
F Turn the key to the left in the driver's door
lock once to unlock the driver's door only.
F Turn the key to the left in the driver's door
lock again to unlock the other doors and
the boot.
F Press the open padlock once to
unlock the driver's door only.
F Press the open padlock again to unlock
the other doors and the boot.
The complete or selective
unlocking parameter is set via
the vehicle configuration menu.
Complete unlocking is activated by default.
F First press this button to unfold
the key.
The selective unlocking is only available
on versions fitted with deadlocking.
The direction indicators flash for a
few seconds.
According to version, the door mirrors
unfold, the welcome lighting comes on
and the alarm is deactivated.
Acc ess
46
3008_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2015
Deadlocking using the remote
control
F Press the closed padlock to
lock the vehicle completely
or press the closed padlock
for more than two seconds
to close the windows
automatically in addition to
locking (according to version).
Normal locking using the key
F Turn the key to the right in the driver's door
lock to lock the vehicle completely.
Locking the vehicle
F Press the closed padlock to
lock the vehicle completely.
F Press the closed padlock for more
than two seconds to close the windows
automatically in addition to locking
(according to version).
Normal locking using the remote
control
F Press the closed padlock again within
five seconds to deadlock the vehicle.
If one of the doors or the boot is not fully
closed, locking does not take place.
However, the alarm (if fitted) will be fully
activated after about 45 seconds.
If the vehicle is unlocked inadvertently
and with no action then on the doors
or boot, it will relock automatically after
about thirty seconds.
If the alarm had been activated
previously, it will not be reactivated
automatically.
The folding and unfolding of the door
mirrors using the remote control can be
deactivated by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
The direction indicators come on for a
few seconds.
Depending on version, the door mirrors
fold at the same time, and when locking
using the remote control only, the alarm
is activated.
2
Acc ess
47
3008_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2015
Locating your vehicle
Folding the key
F First press this button to fold
the key.
If you do not press the button when
folding the key, there is a risk of
damage to the mechanism.
Deadlocking using the key
F Turn the key to the right in the driver's door
lock to lock the vehicle completely and hold
it in this position for more than two seconds
to close the windows automatically in
addition to locking (according to version).
F Turn the key to the right again within
five seconds to deadlock the vehicle.
Deadlocking is confirmed by fixed lighting
of the direction indicators for approximately
two seconds.
According to version, the door mirrors fold at
the same time.
Deadlocking renders the exterior and
interior door controls inoperative.
It also deactivates the manual central
control button.
Therefore, never leave anyone inside
the vehicle when it is deadlocked.
F Press the closed padlock on
the remote control to identify
your vehicle from a distance,
particularly in low light. Your
vehicle must be locked.
This will cause illumination of the direction
indicators for a few seconds.
Acc ess
48
3008_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2015
Remote control problem
Following disconnection of the vehicle battery,
replacement of the remote control battery or in
the event of a remote control fault you can no
longer unlock, lock or locate your vehicle.
F First of all, use the key in the lock to unlock
or lock your vehicle.
F Then, reinitialise the remote control.
Changing the battery
Battery ref.: CR1620 / 3 volts.
Reinitialisation
F Switch off the ignition.
F Turn the key to position 2 (Ignition on).
F Press the closed padlock immediately for a
few seconds.
F Switch off the ignition and remove the key
from the ignition switch.
The remote control is fully operational again.
If the battery is flat, you are informed
by illumination of this warning lamp,
an audible signal and a message.
If the problem persists, contact a
PEUGEOT dealer as soon as possible.
F Unclip the casing using a coin at the notch.
F Slide the flat battery out of its location.
F Slide the new battery into its location
observing the original direction.
F Clip the casing.
F Reinitialise the remote control.
2
Acc ess
49
3008_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2015
Lost keys
Go to a PEUGEOT dealer with the vehicle's registration document, your personal
identification documents and if possible the key code label.
The PEUGEOT dealer will be able to look up the key code and the transponder code
required to order a new key.
Do not throw the remote control
batteries away, they contain metals
which are harmful to the environment.
Take them to an approved collection
point.
Remote control
The high frequency remote control is a sensitive system; do not operate it while it is in your
pocket as there is a possibility that it may unlock the vehicle, without you being aware of it.
Do not repeatedly press the buttons of your remote control out of range and out of sight of
your vehicle. You run the risk of stopping it from working and the remote control would have
to be reinitialised.
No remote control can operate when the key is in the ignition switch, even when the ignition
is switched off, except for reinitialisation.
Locking the vehicle
Driving with the doors locked may make access to the passenger compartment by the
emergency services more difficult in an emergency.
As a safety precaution, never leave children alone in the vehicle, except for a very short period.
In all cases, it is essential to remove the key from the ignition switch when leaving the
vehicle.
Anti-theft protection
Do not make any modifications to the electronic engine immobiliser system; this could
cause malfunctions.
When purchasing a second-hand vehicle
Have the pairing of all of the keys in your possession checked by a PEUGEOT dealer, to
ensure that only your keys can be used to open and start the vehicle.
Acc ess
50
3008_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2015
Alarm
Locking the vehicle with full
alarm
Activation
F Switch off the ignition and get out of the
vehicle.
F Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the
locking button on the remote control.
The alarm is activated; the indicator lamp in
button A flashes once per second.
Exterior perimiter protection
The system detects opening of the vehicle.
The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to enter
the vehicle by forcing a door, the boot or the
bonnet.
Interior volumetric protection
The system detects any variation in the volume
in the passenger compartment.
The alarm is triggered if anyone breaks a
window or moves inside the vehicle.
If you wish to leave a pet in the vehicle or a
window partially open, deactivate the interior
volumetric protection.
Anti-tamper function
The system detects the putting out of service of
its components.
The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to put
the wires of the siren, the central control or the
battery out of service.
Deactivation
F Unlock the vehicle using the unlocking
button on the remote control.
The alarm is deactivated; the indicator lamp in
button A switches off.
System which protects and provides a deterrent against the theft of your vehicle. It provides two types of protection, exterior and interior, as well as an
anti-tamper function.
Do not make any modifications to
the alarm system, this could cause
malfunctions.
In the event of automatic relocking
of the vehicle (occurs after an
unintentional unlocking followed by a
period of 30 seconds without opening a
door or the boot), the monitoring system
is not reactivated automatically. To
reactivate the system, it is necessary to
unlock the vehicle and then lock it again
using the key or the remote control.
If a door, the boot or the bonnet is not
fully closed, the vehicle is then not
locked, but perimeter monitoring will
be active after a period of 45 seconds,
at the same time as the volumetric
monitoring.
2
Acc ess
51
3008_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2015
Triggering
This is indicated by sounding of the siren
and flashing of the direction indicators for
approximately thirty seconds.
After it has been triggered, the alarm is again
operational.
Failure of the remote control
F Unlock the vehicle using the key in the
driver's door lock.
F Open the door; the alarm is triggered.
F Switch on the ignition; the alarm stops.
Malfunction
When the ignition is switched on, illumination
the indicator lamp in button A for ten seconds
indicates a siren fault.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Locking the vehicle without
activating the alarm
F Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the key
in the driver's door lock.
The direction indicators do not come on.
Automatic operation*
Depending on the legislation in force in your
country, one of these cases may occur:
- 45 seconds after the vehicle is locked
using the remote control, the alarm is
activated, regardless of the status of the
doors and boot.
- 2 minutes after the last door or the boot is
closed, the alarm is activated.
F To avoid triggering the alarm on entering
the vehicle, first press the unlocking
button on the remote control.
If the alarm is triggered ten times in
succession, the eleventh time will result
in it becoming inactive.
If the indicator lamp in button A flashes
rapidly, this indicates that the alarm was
triggered during your absence. When
the ignition is switched on, this flashing
stops immediately.
To avoid triggering the alarm when
washing your vehicle, lock it using the
key in the driver's door lock.
Do not activate the alarm before
disconnecting the battery, otherwise the
siren will sound.
Reactivation of the interior
volumetric protection
F Unlock the vehicle using the unlocking
button on the remote control.
F Relock the vehicle using the remote
control.
The alarm is activated again with both types
of protection; the indicator lamp in button A
switches off.
Locking the vehicle with
exterior protection alarm only
Deactivation of the interior
volumetric protection
F Switch off the ignition.
F Within ten seconds, press button A until
the indicator lamp is on continuously.
F Get out of the vehicle.
F Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the
locking button on the remote control.
The exterior protection alarm alone remains
activated; the indicator lamp in button A flashes
once per second.
To be effective, this deactivation must
be carried out each time the ignition is
switched off.
* Depending on the country of sale.
Acc ess
52
3008_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2015
Electric windows
1. Front left
2. Front right
3. Rear right
4. Rear left
5. Deactiavation of the rear controls
for the rear electric windows or
deactivation of the rear controls for
the rear electric windows and the rear
doors (version with electric child lock)
Safety anti-pinch
When the window rises and meets an obstacle,
it stops and partially lowers again.
Automatic mode
F Press or pull the control firmly. The window
opens or closes fully when the control is
released.
F Pressing the control again stops the
movement of the window.
One-touch electric windows
System for opening or closing a window
manually or automatically. Fitted with a safety
anti-pinch system and a system for deactivation
in the event of misuse of the rear controls.
Manual mode
F Press or pull the control gently. The
window stops when the control is released.
After approximately ten consecutive
complete opening/closing movements
of the window, a protection function
is activated to prevent damage to the
electric window motor.
After this, you have approximately one
minute in which to close the window.
Once the window is closed, the controls
will become operational again after
approximately 40 minutes.
The electric window controls remain
operational for approximately
45 seconds after the ignition is switched
off or until the vehicle is locked after a
front door is opened.
If one of the passenger windows cannot
be operated from the driver's door
control panel, carry out the operation
from the control pad of the passenger
door concerned, and vice versa.
If the window cannot be closed
(for example, in the presence of ice),
immediately after the movement is
reversed:
F Press and hold the control until the
window opens fully.
F Then pull the control immediately
and hold it until the window closes.
F Continue to hold the control for
approximately one second after the
window has closed.
The safety anti-pinch function is not
operational during these operations.
2
Acc ess
53
3008_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2015
Reinitialisation
If a window does not rise automatically or
following disconnection of the battery, the anti-
pinch function must be reinitialised.
For each window:
F Pull the control until the window stops.
F Release the control and pull it again.
F Repeat these operations until the window
closes fully.
F Continue to hold the control for
approximately one second after the window
has closed.
F Press the control to lower the window
automatically to the low position.
F Once the window has reached the low
position, press the control again for
approximately one second.
Deactivation of the rear
electric windows
F For the safety of your children, with the
ignition on, press control 5 to deactivate
the rear controls for the rear electric
windows. Only the driver can then operates
the rear electric windows, regardless of
their position.
It is still possible to open the doors from the
outside and operate the rear electric windows
from the driver's control panel.
The safety anti-pinch function is not
operational during these operations.
Indicator lamp on, the rear controls are
deactivated.
Indicator lamp off, the rear controls are
activated.
Always remove the key from the ignition
when leaving the vehicle, even for a
short time.
If an obstacle is encountered during
operation of the electric windows, you
must reverse the movement of the
window. To do this, press the control
concerned.
Before operating the passengers'
electric windows, the driver must
ensure that there is nothing and no one
preventing the correct closing of the
windows.
The driver must ensure that the
passengers use the electric windows
correctly.
Be particularly aware of children when
operating the windows.
For versions fitted with electric child
lock, this control also deactivates the
interior controls for the rear doors; see
the "Child lock" section.
Acc ess
54
3008_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2015
Doors
F After unlocking the vehicle completely
using the remote control or the key, pull the
door handle.
With selective unlocking, pull the driver's door
handle.
From inside
F Pull the door control (front or rear) to
open the door; this unlocks this vehicle
completely.
Closing
When a door or the boot is not closed correctly:
- When the engine is running,
this warning lamp comes on,
accompanied by a message in
the multifunction screen for a
few seconds,
Opening
From outside
- When the vehicle is moving (speed
higher than 6 mph (10 km/h)), this
warning lamp comes on, accompanied
by an audible signal and a message for a
few seconds.
The interior door controls do not
operate when the vehicle is deadlocked.
2
Acc ess
55
3008_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2015
Central locking
System which provides full manual locking or
unlocking of the doors from the inside.
F Press this button to lock the vehicle.
The red indicator lamp in the button comes on.
Automatic central locking
Unlocking
F Press this button again to unlock the
vehicle.
The red indicator lamp in the button goes off.
Activation
F Press this button for more than
two seconds.
If one of the doors is open, the central
locking from the inside does not take
place.
When locking / deadlocking from
the outside
When the vehicle is locked or deadlocked from
the outside, the red indicator lamp flashes and
the button is inactive.
F After normal locking, pull the interior door
lever to unlock the vehicle.
F After deadlocking, it is necessary to use
the remote control or the key to unlock the
vehicle.
A confirmation message is displayed,
accompanied by an audible signal.
System which provides full automatic locking or
unlocking of the doors and boot while driving.
You can activate or deactivate this function.
Manual central locking
Acc ess
56
3008_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2015
Automatic locking
Above 6 mph (10 km/h), the doors and boot
lock automatically.
If one of the doors is open, the automatic
central locking does not take place.
If the boot is open, the automatic central
locking of the doors is active.
Deactivation
F Press this button again for more than
two seconds.
Unlocking
F Above 6 mph (10 km/h), press this button to
unlock the doors and boot temporarily.
In the event of an impact, the doors
unlock automatically.
Back-up control
System allowing the doors to be locked and
unlocked manually in the event of a malfunction
of the central locking system or battery failure.
F Open the doors.
F On the rear doors, check that the child lock
is not on (see the corresponding section).
F Remove the black cap, located on the edge
of the door, using the key.
F Insert the key in the socket without forcing
it, then without turning it, move the latch
sideways towards the inside of the door.
F Remove the key and refit the cap.
F Close the doors and check that the vehicle
has locked correctly from the outside.
Locking the driver's door
F Insert the key in the door lock, then turn it
to the rear.
You can also apply the procedure described for
the passenger doors.
Unlocking the driver's door
F Insert the key in the door lock, then turn it
to the front.
Locking the front and rear
passenger doors
Unlocking the front and rear
passenger doors
F Pull the interior door opening control.
A confirmation message is displayed,
accompanied by an audible signal.
2
Acc ess
57
3008_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2015
Opening
Boot
Closing
F After unlocking the vehicle, press the
handle A and raise the tailgate.
F Close the lower tailgate.
F Pull the handle B downwards to guide the
tailgate.
If the tailgate is not fully closed:
- engine running, this warning
lamp comes on, accompanied by
a message in the multifunction
screen for a few seconds,
- vehicle moving (speed above 6 mph -
10 km/h), this warning lamp comes on,
accompanied by an audible signal and a
message in the multifunction screen for a
few seconds
Acc ess
58
3008_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2015
Lower tailgate
Opening Closing
Before opening the boot, ensure that
there is nothing or anyone within the
opening radius.
For reasons of safety, correct operation
and compliance with regulations, do
not drive with the boot and the lower
tailgate open.
If the battery is disconnected, the boot
cannot be opened.
Do not climb onto the lower tailgate and
do not subject it to heavy knocks, it may
be damaged.
Always close the lower tailgate and
check that it is secured correctly before
closing the boot.
When closing the lower tailgate, ensure
that no person or object is in the
proximity of the moving parts to avoid
any risk of injury or damage.
Do not open the lower tailgate when a
towbar is fitted.
Maximum authorised weight on the
lower tailgate when open: 200 kg.
F Push the handle C to the right and tilt the
tailgate D gently.
F Raise the tailgate D, push it fully to close it,
check that it is secured correctly.
3
Comfor t
59
3008_en_Chap03_confort_ed01-2015
Heating and
Ventilation
Controls
The incoming air follows various routes
depending on the controls selected by
the driver, the front passenger and rear
passengers, according to the level of
equipment.
The temperature control enables you to obtain
the level of comfort required by mixing the air of
the various circuits.
The air distribution control enables you to
select the air vents used in the passenger
compartment by the combined use of the
associated buttons.
Air intake
The air circulating in the passenger
compartment is filtered and originates either
from the outside via the grille located at the
base of the windscreen or from the inside in air
recirculation mode.
Air distribution
1. Windscreen demisting/defrosting vents.
2. Front side window demisting/defrosting
vents.
3. Side adjustable air vents.
4. Central adjustable air vents.
5. Air outlets to the front footwells.
6. Adjustable air vents for the rear
passengers.
7. Air outlets to the rear footwells.
The air flow control enables you to increase or
reduce the speed of the ventilation fan.
These controls are grouped together on control
panel A on the centre console.
Comfor t
60
3008_en_Chap03_confort_ed01-2015
Recommendations for ventilation and air conditioning
In order for these systems to be fully effective, follow the operation and maintenance
guidelines below:
F If the interior temperature remains very high after the vehicle has been parked in the sun for
a considerable time, first ventilate the passenger compartment for a few minutes.
Place the air flow control at a sufficient level to provide an adequate renewal of air in the
passenger compartment.
F To obtain an even air distribution, take care not to obstruct the exterior air intake grilles
located at the base of the windscreen, the nozzles, the vents and the air outlets, as well
as the air extractor located in the boot.
F Use in preference the intake of exterior air as prolonged use of the air recirculation may
cause misting of the windows and side windows.
F Do not cover the sunshine sensor, located on the dashboard; this is used for regulation
of the automatic air conditioning system.
F Operate the air conditioning system for 5 to 10 minutes, once or twice a month to keep it
in good working order.
F Ensure that the passenger compartment filter is in good condition and have the filter
elements replaced regularly (refer to the "Checks" section).
We recommend the use of a combined passenger compartment filter. Thanks to its
second special active filter, it contributes to the purification of the air breathed by the
occupants and the cleanliness of the passenger compartment (reduction of allergic
symptoms, bad odours and greasy deposits).
F The air conditioning uses power from the engine while operating. This results in an
increase in the vehicle's fuel consumption.
When towing at or near maximum capacity or on steep slopes in high ambient
temperatures, switching off the air conditioning saves engine power and so improves
towing capacity.
Condensation created by the air conditioning results in a discharge of water under the
vehicle when stationary, which is perfectly normal.
F To ensure correct operation of the air conditioning system, you are also advised to have
it checked regularly.
F If the system does not produce cold air, do not use it and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or
a qualified workshop.
The air conditioning system does not
contain chlorine and does not present
any danger to the ozone layer.
3
Comfor t
61
3008_en_Chap03_confort_ed01-2015
2. Air ow adjustment
F Turn the dial from position 1
to position 5 to obtain a
comfortable air flow.
Windscreen, side windows and
front-rear footwells.
Footwells, front-rear
(closing the vents increases the
flow to the footwells).
Central, side and rear vents.
F Turn the dial from blue
(cold) to red (hot) to adjust
the temperature to your
requirements.
Windscreen and side windows.
1. Temperature adjustment
The air distribution can be
adapted by placing the dial in
an intermediate position.
The air conditioning can only operate with the
engine running.
4. Air intake / Air recirculation
The intake of exterior air limits misting of the
windscreen and side windows.
The recirculation of interior air insulates the
passenger compartment from exterior odours
and smoke.
Return to exterior air intake as soon as possible
to prevent deterioration of the air quality and
demisting performance.
3. Air distribution adjustment
F Press the button to recirculate
the interior air. The indicator
lamp comes on to confirm this.
F Press the button again to permit the intake
of exterior air. The indicator lamp goes off
to confirm this.
Manual air conditioning
F If you place the air flow control
in position 0 (deactivation of the
system), the temperature is no
longer maintained at a comfortable
level. However, a slight flow of air,
due to the movement of the vehicle,
can still be felt.
Comfor t
62
3008_en_Chap03_confort_ed01-2015
Demisting/defrosting
5. Air conditioning On / Off
The air conditioning is designed to
operate effectively in all seasons,
with the windows closed.
It enables you to:
- lower the temperature, in summer,
- increase the effectiveness of the demisting
in winter, above 3 °C.
Switching off
F Press the "A/C" button again, the button's
indicator lamp goes off.
Switching off may affect comfort levels
(humidity, condensation).
Switching on
F Press the "A/C" button, the button's
indicator lamp comes on.
The air conditioning does not operate when the
air flow adjustment control 2 is in position "0".
To obtain cooled air more quickly, you can use
recirculation of interior air for a few moments.
Then return to fresh air intake.
The marking on the control panel
indicates the position of the
controls to quickly demist or
defrost the windscreen and side
windows:
F place the air intake control 4 in the
"Exterior air intake" position (indicator lamp
off),
F place the air distribution dial 3 in the
"Windscreen position",
F place the air flow dial 2 in position 5
(maximum),
F place the temperature dial 1 in the red
position (hot).
With Stop & Start, when demisting has
been activated, the STOP mode is not
available.
The rear screen demist - defrost
can only operate when the engine is
running.
3
Comfor t
63
3008_en_Chap03_confort_ed01-2015
The control button is located on
the air conditioning system control
panel.
Rear screen demist - defrost
Switching on
F Press this button to demist/defrost the rear
screen and, depending on version, the door
mirrors. The indicator lamp associated with
the button comes on.
Switching off
The demist/defrost switches off automatically to
prevent an excessive consumption of current.
F It is possible to stop the demist/defrost
operation before it is switched off
automatically by pressing the button again.
The indicator lamp associated with the
button goes off.
F Switch off the demist/defrost of the
rear screen and door mirrors as
soon as it is no longer needed as
lower current consumption results
in reduced fuel consumption.
Comfor t
64
3008_en_Chap03_confort_ed01-2015
The air conditioning can only operate with the
engine running.
The driver and front passenger can
each adjust the temperature to their
requirements.
F Turn control 2 or 3 to the left or to the right
respectively to decrease or increase this
value.
A setting around the value 21 provides
optimum comfort. However, depending on your
requirements, a setting between 18 and 24 is
normal.
You are advised to avoid a left / right setting
difference of more than 3.
4. Automatic visibility
programme
The automatic comfort programme
may not be sufficient to quickly
demist or defrost the windscreen
and side windows (humidity,
several passengers, ice, etc.).
F In this case, select the automatic visibility
programme.
The system automatically controls the air
conditioning, the air flow and the air intake and
provides optimum distribution of the ventilation
to the windscreen and side windows.
F To switch it off, press the "visibility"
button again or press the "AUTO" button,
the indicator lamp in the button goes off or
the indicator lamp in the "AUTO" button
comes on.
Automatic operation
F Press the "AUTO" button. The
indicator lamp in the button
comes on.
2-3. Driver-passenger side
adjustment
Dual-zone digital air conditioning
We recommend the use of this mode: it permits
automatic and optimised adjustment of all
of the functions, passenger compartment
temperature, air flow, air distribution and air
recirculation, in accordance with the comfort
value that you have chosen.
This system is designed to operate effectively
in all seasons, with the windows closed.
The value indicated in the screen corresponds
to a level of comfort and not to a temperature in
degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit.
1. Automatic comfort programme
To prevent too great a distribution of
cold air when the engine is cold, the
air flow will reach its optimum level
gradually.
In cold weather, it favours the
distribution of warm air to the
windscreen, side windows and footwells
only.
On entering the vehicle, if the interior
temperature is much colder or warmer
than the comfort value, there is no
need to change the value displayed in
order to obtain the comfort required
more quickly. The system corrects the
difference in temperature automatically
and as quickly as possible.
3
Comfor t
65
3008_en_Chap03_confort_ed01-2015
Manual operation
F Press this button to switch off
the air conditioning.
6. Air distribution adjustment
F Press one or more buttons to
direct the air flow towards:
7. Air ow adjustment
F Turn this control to the left to
decrease the air flow or to the
right to increase the air flow.
5. Air conditioning On / Off
- the windscreen and side windows
(demisting or defrosting),
- the windscreen, the side
windows and the vents,
- the windscreen, the side windows,
the vents and the footwells,
- the vents and the footwells,
- the vents,
- the footwells,
- the windscreen, the side
windows and the footwells.
The air flow indicator lamps, between the
two fans, come on progressively in relation to
the value requested.
Switching the system off could result in some
discomfort (humidity, condensation).
F Press this button again to return to
automatic operation of the air conditioning.
The indicator lamp in the "A/C" button
comes on.
If you wish, you can make a different choice
from that offered by the system by changing
a setting. The other functions will still be
controlled automatically.
F Pressing the "AUTO" button returns the
system to completely automatic operation.
To obtain cool air more quickly, you can use
interior air recirculation for a few moments. The
return to the intake of exterior air.
In winter, we recommend keeping the rear air
vents closed.
For maximum cooling or heating of the
passenger compartment, it is possible
to exceed the minimum value 14 or the
maximum value 28.
F Turn control 2 or 3 to the left
until "LO" (low) is displayed or
to the right until "HI" (high) is
displayed.
With Stop & Start, when demisting has
been activated, the STOP mode is not
available.
Comfor t
66
3008_en_Chap03_confort_ed01-2015
9. Mono-zone / Dual-zone
F Press this button to equalise
the comfort value on the
passenger side with that on
the driver's side (mono-zone).
The indicator lamp in the button
comes on.
8. Air recirculation
F Press this button to
recirculate the interior air. The
indicator lamp for the button
corresponding to the function
chosen comes on.
- Closed/Air intake (automatic
mode). Press this button, the
indicator lamp comes on.
Switching the system off
and on again
Air recirculation enables the passenger
compartment to be isolated from exterior
odours and smoke.
F As soon as possible, press the "auto"
button to allow the intake of exterior air and
avoid misting.
Avoid driving for prolonged periods with
the system off.
F Turn the air flow control to the left until all
of the indicator lamps go off.
This action switches off all of the functions of
the system.
Temperature related comfort is no longer
guaranteed but a slight flow of air, due to the
movement of the vehicle, can still be felt.
F Turn the air flow control to the right or
press the "AUTO" button to reactivate the
system with the values set before it was
switched off.
- Forced closing of air intake
(manual mode). press this
button to recirculate the interior
air, the indicator lamp comes
on.
3
Comfor t
67
3008_en_Chap03_confort_ed01-2015
Front seats with manual adjustments
Height
F Pull the control upwards to raise or push
it downwards to lower, as many times as
required, to obtain the position required.
Backrest angle
F Push the control rearwards.
Forwards-backwards
F Raise the control and slide the seat
forwards or backwards.
Seat consisting of a seat cushion, a seat back and a head restraint which can all be adjusted to adapt your position for ease of driving and comfort.
Before moving the seat backwards, ensure that there is nothing that might prevent the full travel of the seat, so as to avoid the risk of of
jamming the seat caused by the presence of objects on the floor behind the seat or rear passengers. If the seat jams, stop the movement
immediately.
Comfor t
68
3008_en_Chap03_confort_ed01-2015
Driver's electric seat
Forwards-backwards
F Push the control forwards or rearwards to
slide the seat.
Cushion height and
angle
F Tilt the rear part of the control upwards or
downwards to obtain the required height.
F Tilt the front part of the control upwards or
downwards to obtain the required angle.
Backrest angle
F Tilt the control forwards or rearwards to
adjust the angle of the seat back.
Seat consisting of a seat cushion, a seat back and a head restraint which can all be adjusted to adapt your position for ease of driving and comfort.
3
Comfor t
69
3008_en_Chap03_confort_ed01-2015
The electric functions of the driver's
seat are active for approximately
one minute after opening the front door.
They are deactivated approximately
one minute after the ignition is switched
off and in economy mode.
To reactivate them, switch on the ignition.
Before moving the seat backwards,
ensure that there is nothing that might
prevent the full travel of the seat, so
as to avoid the risk of of jamming the
seat caused by the presence of objects
on the floor behind the seat or rear
passengers. If the seat jams, stop the
movement immediately.
Head restraint height and
angle adjustment
F To raise the head restraint, pull it forwards
and upwards at the same time.
F To remove the head restraint, press the
lug A and pull the head restraint upwards.
F To put the head restraint back in place,
engage the head restraint stems in
the openings keeping them in line with
the seat back.
F To lower the head restraint, press the lug A
and the head restraint at the same time.
F To adjust the angle of the head restraint, tilt
its lower part forwards or rearwards.
The head restraint is fitted with a frame
with notches which prevents it from
lowering; this is a safety device in case
of impact.
The adjustment is correct when the
upper edge of the head restraint is
level with the top of the head.
Before moving off, check the
adjustment of the head restraint; adjust
it if the seat has been occupied by
someone of different size.
Never drive with the head restraints
removed; they must be in place and
adjusted correctly.
Comfor t
70
3008_en_Chap03_confort_ed01-2015
Heated seats control
With the engine running, the front seats can be
heated separately.
F Use the adjustment dial, placed on the side
of each front seat, to switch on and select
the level of heating required:
0: Off.
1: Low.
2: Medium.
3: High.
Manual lumbar adjustment
F Turn the knob manually to obtain the
desired level of lumbar support.
3
Comfor t
71
3008_en_Chap03_confort_ed01-2015
Folding the seat backrest
F Check that no object, either on or
underneath the seat, could hinder its
movement.
F To make the operation easier, place the
head restraint in the low position (if the
seat is in the fully forward position).
F If your vehicle is fitted with the video pack,
place the protective cover on the head
restraint.
F Lift the control, located behind the seat,
then guide the seat backrest forwards.
When the seat backrest is in this position, the
seat behind it and the centre rear seat must not
be occupied.
This position, associated with that of the rear
seats, allows you to transport long objects
inside the vehicle.
The maximum weight on the seat is 30 kg.
Table position, front passenger seat
Returning the seat to the normal position
F Guide the seat backrest rearwards until it
locks in place.
Comfor t
72
3008_en_Chap03_confort_ed01-2015
Folding the seat from the
boot
Each section of the bench seat (1/3 or 2/3) has
its own control to release the seat back and its
seat cushion from the boot.
F Check that nothing is preventing the seat
backrest from folding (head restraint, seat
belts, ...).
F Check also that no object on or under the
seat could hinder its movement.
F Pull the control from the boot.
Rear seats
Rear head restraints
They can also be removed.
To remove a head restraint:
F Pull the head restraint fully upwards.
F Then, press the lug A.
Bench seat the left-hand (2/3) or right-hand (1/3) section of which can be folded to adapt the boot load space.
These have a high position (comfort and safety)
and a low position (rear visibility).
Never drive with rear passengers when
the head restraints are removed; the
head restraints must be in place and in
the high position.
3
Comfor t
73
3008_en_Chap03_confort_ed01-2015
Folding the seat from the rear
F Put the seat backrest in the upright position
and secure it, the seat cushion also returns
to its original position.
F Check that the red indicator, located at the
control 1, is no longer visible.
F Refit the head restraints or put them back
in place.
When returning the rear seat backrest to its original
position, take care not to trap the seat belts and
ensure that their buckles are positioned correctly.
The seat cushion lowers to be covered
by the seat backrest; this leaves a flat
boot floor, if the adjustable floor is in the
intermediate position.
Returning the seat backrest to its original position
Check that no object, either on or underneath
the seat, could hinder its movement.
F Move the corresponding front seat
forwards if necessary.
F Check that the seat belt is positioned
correctly on the side of the seat backrest.
F Place the head restraints in the low
position or remove them if necessary.
F Pull the control 1 forwards to release the
seat backrest 2 which tilts easily onto the
seat cushion 3.
Comfor t
74
3008_en_Chap03_confort_ed01-2015
Mirrors
Each fitted with an adjustable mirror glass
permitting the lateral rearward vision necessary
for overtaking or parking. They can also be
folded for parking in confined spaces.
Folding
- Automatic: lock the vehicle using the
remote control or the key.
- Manual: with the ignition on, pull control A
rearwards.
Unfolding
- Automatic: unlock the vehicle using the
remote control or the key.
- Manual: with the ignition on, pull control A
rearwards.
Adjustment
F Move control A to the right or to the left to
select the corresponding mirror.
F Move control B in all four directions to
adjust.
F Return control A to the central position.
Demisting - Defrosting
If your vehicle is fitted with heated mirrors, the
demisting-defrosting operates by switching on
the heated rear screen.
Refer to the "Rear screen demist-defrost"
section.
If the mirrors are folded using control A,
they will not unfold when the vehicle is
unlocked. Pull again on control A.
The folding and unfolding of the door
mirrors using the remote control can be
deactivated by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Fold the mirrors when putting your
vehicle through an automatic car wash.
The rear screen demist - defrost
can only operate when the engine is
running.
As a safety measure, the mirrors should
be adjusted to reduce the blind spots.
The objects observed are, in reality,
closer than they appear.
Take this into account in order to
correctly judge the distance of vehicles
approaching from behind.
Door mirrors
If necessary, it is possible to fold the
mirrors manually.
3
Comfor t
75
3008_en_Chap03_confort_ed01-2015
Adjustment
F Adjust the mirror so that the glass is
directed correctly in the "day" position.
Manual day/night model
Day / night position
F Pull the lever to change to the "night" anti-
dazzle position.
F Push the lever to change to the normal
"day" position.
Rear view mirror
Adjustable mirror providing a central rearward
view.
Equipped with an anti-dazzle system, which
darkens the mirror glass and reduces the
nuisance to the driver caused by the sun,
headlamps from other vehicles...
Automatic day/night model
By means of a sensor, which measures the
light from the rear of the vehicle, this system
automatically and progressively changes
between the day and night uses.
In order to ensure optimum visibility
during your manoeuvres, the mirror
lightens automatically when reverse
gear is engaged.
Comfor t
76
3008_en_Chap03_confort_ed01-2015
Steering wheel adjustment
F When stationary, pull the control lever to
release the adjustment mechanism.
F Adjust the height and reach to suit your
driving position.
F Push the control lever to lock the
adjustment mechanism.
As a safety precaution, these
operations should only be carried out
with the vehicle stationary.
4
Visibility
77
3008_en_Chap04_visibilite_ed01-2015
Lighting controls
Main lighting
The various front and rear lamps of the vehicle
are designed to adapt the lighting progressively
in relation to the climatic conditions and so
improve the driver's visibility:
- sidelamps, to be seen,
- dipped beam headlamps to see without
dazzling other drivers,
- main beam headlamps to see clearly when
the road is clear,
- directional headlamps for improved
visibility when cornering.
Additional lighting
Other lamps are installed to fulfil the
requirements of particular driving conditions:
- a rear foglamp to be seen from a distance,
- front foglamps for even better visibility,
- daytime running lamps to be seen during
the day.
Function settings
You can activate / deactivate the following
lighting functions:
- automatic guide-me-home lighting,
- automatic illumination of headlamps,
- directional lighting.
Travelling abroad
If using your vehicle in a country that
drives on the other side of the road, the
headlamps must be adjusted to avoid
dazzling on-coming drivers.
Contact an official dealer or a qualified
workshop.
In some weather conditions (e.g. low
temperature or humidity), the presence
of misting on the internal surface of the
glass of the headlamps and rear lamps
is normal; it disappears after the lamps
have been on for a few minutes.
Visibility
78
3008_en_Chap04_visibilite_ed01-2015
Model without AUTO lighting
Model with AUTO lighting
The lighting is controlled directly by the driver
by means of the ring A and the stalk B.
B. Stalk for switching headlamps: pull
the stalk towards you to switch the
lighting between dipped and main beam
headlamps.
In the lamps off and sidelamps modes, the driver
can switch on the main beam headlamps temporarily
("headlamp flash") by maintaining a pull on the stalk.
Automatic illumination of
headlamps.
Lighting off (ignition off) /
Daytime running lamps (engine
running).
Sidelamps.
Dipped headlamps or main beam headlamps.
Displays
Illumination of the corresponding indicator
lamp in the instrument panel confirms that the
lighting selected is on.
Manual controls
A. Main lighting mode selection ring: turn it
to position the symbol required facing
the mark.
4
Visibility
79
3008_en_Chap04_visibilite_ed01-2015
Model with rear foglamp only
Model with front and rear
foglamps
Rear foglamp
This operates with dipped and main beam
headlamps.
F To switch on the foglamp, turn the ring C
forward and release.
F To switch off the foglamp, turn the ring C
rearward and release.
When the lighting is switched on automatically
(with AUTO model), the dipped beam
headlamps and sidelamps remain on until the
rear foglamp is switched off.
Front and rear foglamps
The rear foglamp operates with the dipped and
main beam headlamps.
The front foglamps also operate with the
sidelamps.
F To switch on the front foglamps, turn the
ring C forward and release.
F To switch on the rear foglamp, turn the
ring C forward again and release.
F To switch off the rear foglamp, turn the
ring C rearward and release.
F To switch off the front foglamps, turn the
ring C rearward again and release.
When the lighting is switched on automatically
(with AUTO model), the dipped beam
headlamps and sidelamps remain on until the
rear foglamp is switched off.
When the lighting is switched off automatically
(with AUTO model) or when the dipped beam
headlamps are switched off manually, the
foglamps and the sidelamps will remain on.
C. Foglamp selection ring.
Visibility
80
3008_en_Chap04_visibilite_ed01-2015
Switching off the lighting when
switching off the ignition
When the ignition is switched off, all of the
lamps switch off immediately, except for the
dipped beam headlamps if automatic guide-
me-home lighting is activated.
In good or rainy weather, by both day
and night, the front foglamps and the
rear foglamps are prohibited. In these
situations, the power of their beams
may dazzle other drivers. They should
only be used in fog or falling snow.
In these weather conditions, you should
switch on the foglamps and dipped
beam headlamps manually, as the
sunshine sensor may detect sufficient
light.
Do not forget to switch off the front and
rear foglamps when they are no longer
necessary.
Switching on the lighting when
switching on the ignition
To reactivate the lighting control stalk, turn the
ring A to position "0" - lighting off, then to the
position of your choice.
If the lighting is switched on manually after
switching off the ignition, there is an audible
signal when a front door is opened to warn the
driver that they have forgotten to switch off the
vehicle's lighting, with the ignition off.
They switch off automatically after a period
which depends on the state of charge of the
battery (entry to energy economy mode).
4
Visibility
81
3008_en_Chap04_visibilite_ed01-2015
Manual guide-me-home
lighting
The temporary illumination of the dipped beam
headlamps after the vehicle's ignition has been
switched off makes the driver's exit easier
when the light is poor.
Switching on
F With the ignition off, "flash" the headlamps
using the lighting stalk.
F A further "headlamp flash" switches the
function off.
Switching off
The manual guide-me-home lighting switches
off automatically after a set time.
Front daytime running
lamps
(light-emitting diodes)
They come on automatically when the engine
is started, when the lighting control stalk is in
position "0" or "AUTO".
Visibility
82
3008_en_Chap04_visibilite_ed01-2015
Automatic guide-me-home
lighting
Automatic illumination of headlamps
F Turn the ring to the "AUTO" position. The
activation of the function is accompanied
by the display of a message in the screen.
Deactivation
F Turn the ring to another position.
Deactivation of the function is accompanied
by the display of a message in the screen.
Operating fault
In the event of a malfunction of the
sunshine sensor, the lighting comes
on, this warning lamp is displayed in
the instrument panel and/or a message
appears in the screen, accompanied by an audible
signal.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
When the automatic illumination of headlamps
function is activated (lighting control stalk in
the "AUTO" position), under low ambient light
the dipped beam headlamps remain on when
the ignition is switched off.
Programming
In fog or snow, the sunshine sensor
may detect sufficient light. In this
case, the lighting will not come on
automatically.
Do not cover the sunshine sensor,
coupled with the rain sensor and
located in the centre of the windscreen
behind the rear view mirror; the
associated functions would no longer
be controlled.
When a low level of ambient light is detected by a sunshine sensor, the number plate lamps,
sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps are switched on automatically, without any action on
the part of the driver. They can also come on if rain is detected, at the same time as automatic
operation of the windscreen wipers.
As soon as the brightness returns to a sufficient level or after the windscreen wipers are switched
off, the lamps are switched off automatically.
Activation or deactivation,
as well as the duration of the
guide-me-home lighting, is set
in the vehicle configuration
menu.
Activation
4
Visibility
83
3008_en_Chap04_visibilite_ed01-2015
Exterior welcome lighting
Switching on
F Press the open padlock on the
remote control.
The dipped beam headlamps and the
sidelamps come on; your vehicle is also
unlocked.
The duration of the welcome lighting is
associated with and identical to that of
the automatic guide-me-home lighting.
Switching off
The exterior welcome lighting switches
off automatically after a set time, when
the ignition is switched on or on locking
the vehicle.
The remote switching on of the lighting makes your approach to the vehicle easier in poor light. It is
activated according to the level of light detected by the sunshine sensor.
Visibility
84
3008_en_Chap04_visibilite_ed01-2015
Manual beam
adjustment of
halogen headlamps
To avoid causing a nuisance to other road
users, the height of the halogen headlamps
should be adjusted according to the load in
the vehicle.
0. 1 or 2 people in the front seats.
-. 3 people.
1. 5 people.
-. Intermediate setting.
2. 5 people + maximum authorised load.
-. Intermediate setting.
3. Driver + maximum authorised load.
Automatic beam
adjustment with
xenon headlamps
In order to avoid causing a nuisance to other
road users, this system corrects the height of the
xenon headlamps beam automatically and when
stationary, according to the load in the vehicle.
If a fault occurs, this warning lamp is
displayed on the instrument panel,
accompanied by an audible signal
and a message in the multifunction screen.
The system then places your headlamps in the
lowest position.
The initial setting is position "0".
If a fault occurs, do not touch the xenon
bulbs. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
4
Visibility
85
3008_en_Chap04_visibilite_ed01-2015
Directional lighting
With directional lighting
Without directional lighting
Programming
Operating fault
The system is activated or
deactivated via the vehicle
configuration menu.
If a fault occurs, this warning lamp
flashes in the instrument panel,
accompanied by a message in the
screen.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
This system is linked to the presence of xenon
headlamps.
When the main or dipped beam headlamps are
on, this system illuminates the inside of bends
(from 12 mph - 20 km/h).
The state of the system remains in memory
when the ignition is switched off.
Visibility
86
3008_en_Chap04_visibilite_ed01-2015
Manual controls
Automatic, then single wipe.
Refer to the corresponding
section.
Windscreen wipers
A. Wiping speed selection stalk.
Fast (heavy rain).
Normal (moderate rain).
Intermittent (proportional to the speed
of the vehicle).
Off.
Single wipe (press down and release).
or
Wiper controls
Model with intermittent wiping
Model with AUTO wiping
Programming
You can modify the settings for the following
functions:
- automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers,
- rear wiping on engaging reverse gear.
The vehicle's front and rear wipers are
designed to improve the driver's visibility
progressively according to the weather
conditions.
4
Visibility
87
3008_en_Chap04_visibilite_ed01-2015
B. Rear wiper selection ring:
Park.
Intermittent wipe.
Wash-wipe (set duration).
Reverse gear
When reverse gear is engaged, the rear wiper
will come into operation automatically if the
windscreen wipers are on.
Programming
Rear wiper
Switching the automatic
operation of the rear wiper in
reverse on or off is done via the
vehicle configuration menu.
This function is activated by
default.
If a significant accumulation of snow or
ice is present, or when using a bicycle
carrier on the boot, remember to
deactivate the automatic rear wiper.
Visibility
88
3008_en_Chap04_visibilite_ed01-2015
Windscreen wash
Pull the wiper stalk towards you. The
windscreen wash then the wipers operate for a
set time.
The headlamp wash is also activated if the
dipped beam headlamps are on.
Screenwash/headlamp wash low
level
In the case of vehicles fitted with
headlamp washers, when the
minimum level of the reservoir
is reached, this warning lamp is
displayed in the instrument panel, accompanied
by an audible signal and a message.
The warning lamp is displayed when the
ignition is switched on, or every time the stalk is
operated, until the reservoir is refilled.
Next time you stop, refill the screenwash /
headlamp wash reservoir.
Headlamp wash
Press the end of the lighting stalk to activate
the headlamp wash, when the dipped beam
headlamps are on.
4
Visibility
89
3008_en_Chap04_visibilite_ed01-2015
Automatic rain sensitive
windscreen wipers
The windscreen wipers operate automatically,
without any action on the part of the driver, if
rain is detected (sensor behind the rear view
mirror), adapting their speed to the intensity of
the rainfall.
Activation
This is controlled manually by the driver by
pushing the stalk downwards to the "AUTO"
position.
It is accompanied by a message in the screen.
Switching off
This is controlled manually by the driver by
moving the stalk upwards then returning it to
position "0".
It is accompanied by a message in the screen.
Operating fault
If an automatic wiping malfunction occurs, the
wipers will operate in intermittent mode.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Do not cover the rain sensor, linked with
the sunshine sensor and located in the
centre of the windscreen behind the rear
view mirror.
Switch off the automatic rain sensitive
wipers when using an automatic car wash.
In winter, to avoid damaging the wiper
blades, it is advisable to wait until the
windscreen is completely clear of ice
before activating the automatic rain
sensitive wipers.
The automatic rain sensitive wipers
must be reactivated if the ignition has
been off for more than one minute, by
pushing the stalk downwards.
Visibility
90
3008_en_Chap04_visibilite_ed01-2015
Special position of the
windscreen wipers
This position permits release of the windscreen
wiper blades.
It is used for cleaning or replacement of the
blades. It can also be useful, in winter, to
detach the blades from the windscreen.
F Any action on the wiper stalk in the minute
after switching off the ignition places the
blades vertically on the screen.
F To park the blades again, switch on the
ignition and operate the wiper stalk.
To maintain the effectiveness of the flat
wiper blades, it is advisable to:
- handle them with care,
- clean them regularly using soapy
water,
- avoid using them to retain
cardboard on the windscreen,
- replace them at the first signs of
wear.
4
Visibility
91
3008_en_Chap04_visibilite_ed01-2015
Courtesy lamps
3. Rear side reading lamps
4. Rear courtesy lamp
Front and rear courtesy lamps
In this position, the courtesy lamp
comes on gradually:
Map reading lamps
F With the ignition on, press the
corresponding switch.
- when the vehicle is unlocked,
- when the key is removed from the ignition,
- when a door is opened,
- when the remote control locking button is
activated, in order to locate your vehicle.
Permanently off.
Permanently on.
Rear side reading lamps
It switches off gradually:
- when the vehicle is locked,
- when the ignition is switched on,
- 30 seconds after the last door is closed.
Take care not to place anything in contact with
the courtesy lamps.
1. Front courtesy lamp
2. Map reading lamps
With the "permanent lighting" mode, the lighting
time varies according to the circumstances:
-
with the ignition off, approximately
ten minutes,
-
in energy economy mode, approximately
thirty seconds,
-
with the engine running, unlimited.
F With the ignition on, the first press of the
reading lamp switch puts the reading lamp
in "permanently on" mode.
F Following a second press, it comes on:
- when the vehicle is unlocked,
- when the key is removed from the
ignition,
- when a door is opened,
- when the remote control locking button is
pressed, in order to locate your vehicle.
It switches off gradually:
- when the vehicle is locked,
- when the ignition is switched on,
- 30 seconds after the last door is closed.
Visibility
92
3008_en_Chap04_visibilite_ed01-2015
Footwell lighting
Its operation is identical to that of the courtesy
lamps. The lamps come on when one of the
doors is opened.
The soft lighting provided by the footwell lamps
improves visibility in the vehicle when the light
is poor.
Switching on
Interior mood
lighting
Switching on
At night, the mood lamp in the front courtesy
lamp comes on automatically when the
sidelamps are switched on.
Switching off
The interior mood lighting switches off
automatically when the sidelamps are switched
off.
Door mirror
spotlamps
To make your approach to the vehicle easier,
these illuminate:
- the zones facing the driver’s and
passenger’s doors,
- the zones forward of the door mirrors and
rearward of the front doors.
Switching on
The spotlamps come on:
- when you unlock the vehicle,
- when you remove the key from the ignition,
- when you open a door,
- when you use the remote control.
Switching off
They are timed to go off automatically.
The dimmed passenger compartment lighting
improves visibility in the vehicle when the light
is poor.
4
Visibility
93
3008_en_Chap04_visibilite_ed01-2015
This comes on automatically when the boot is
opened and switches off automatically when
the boot is closed.
Boot lamp
Different lighting times are available:
- when the ignition is off, approximately
ten minutes,
- in energy economy mode,
approximately thirty seconds,
- when the engine is running, no limit.
Fittings
94
3008_en_Chap05_amenagements_ed01-2015
Interior ttings
1. Sun visor
2. Grab handle with coat hook
3. Storage compartment
4. Storage compartment under the
steering wheel
5. Storage compartment
6. Console handle
7. Storage compartment with net
8. Illuminated glove box
9. Door pockets
10. Front 12 V accessory socket (120 W)
11. Cup holder
12. Front armrest with storage
compartment
13. Storage compartment
14. Rear 12 V accessory socket (120 W)
5
Fittings
95
3008_en_Chap05_amenagements_ed01-2015
Driver's storage
compartments
Storage box
This has storage areas for the handbook
pack, ...
F To open, pull the handle then tilt the box.
Illuminated glove
box
This has storage areas, audio sockets for a
portable player, ...
F To open the glove box, raise the handle.
The lamp comes on when the lid is opened.
Sun visor
Component which protects against sunlight
from the front or the side, also equipped with an
illuminated vanity mirror.
F With the ignition on, raise the concealing
flap; the mirror is lit automatically.
This sun visor is also equipped with a ticket
holder.
Card holder
This can be used for a toll payment ticket or
parking card, for example.
Coin storage
Storage
To connect a portable player refer to
the "Audio equipment and telematics"
section.
Fittings
96
3008_en_Chap05_amenagements_ed01-2015
Front armrest
Storage
A ventilation outlet distributes cooled air.
PEUGEOT Connect USB
This connection unit consists of a JACK
auxiliary socket and/or a USB port.
It permits the connection of a portable device,
such as a digital audio player of the iPod
®
type
or a USB memory stick.
It reads the audio file formats (mp3, ogg, wma,
wav...) which are transmitted to your audio
system and played via the vehicle's speakers.
You can manage these files using the steering
mounted controls or the audio system control
panel and display them in the multifunction
screen.
Connected to the USB port, the portable device
charges automatically.
While charging, a message is displayed if the
current consumption by the portable device
exceeds the amperage delivered by the vehicle.
Comfort and storage device for the driver and
front passenger.
F Raise the cover on the left.
For more information on the use of
this equipment, refer to the "Audio
equipment and telematics" section.
5
Fittings
97
3008_en_Chap05_amenagements_ed01-2015
Mats
Refitting
To refit the mat on the driver's side:
F position the mat correctly,
F refit the fixings by pressing,
F check that the mat is secured correctly.
Fitting
When fitting the mat for the first time, on the
driver's side use only the fixings provided in the
wallet attached.
The other mats are simply placed on the
carpet.
Removal
To remove the mat on the driver's side:
F move the seat as far back as possible,
F unclip the fixings,
F remove the mat.
12 V accessory
sockets
F To connect a 12 V accessory (max power:
120 Watts), remove the cover and connect
a suitable adaptor.
Exceeding the maximum power could result in
damage to your accessory.
Removable carpet protection.
To avoid any risk of jamming of the
pedals:
- only use mats which are suited to
the fixings already present in the
vehicle; these fixings must be used,
- never fit one mat on top of another.
The use of mats not approved by
PEUGEOT may interfere with access to
the pedals and hinder the operation of
the cruise control / speed limiter.
The mats approved by PEUGEOT have
two fixings located below the seat.
The connection of an electrical device
not approved by PEUGEOT, such as a
USB charger, may adversely affect the
operation of vehicle electrical systems,
causing faults such as poor telephone
reception or interference with displays
in the screens.
Fittings
98
3008_en_Chap05_amenagements_ed01-2015
Rear multimedia
This multimedia system allows rear passengers
to connect one or two external portable
systems (audio or video player, games
consoles, DVD player...). The sound is played
through two Bluetooth
®
wireless headphone
sets, while the video content is displayed in
two 7-inch screens built into the backs of the
front seat head restraints.
Description
This system operates only with the
engine running.
The pack includes:
- the connection and control panel fitted on
the rear face of the centre console,
- two 7-inch screens built into the front head
restraints (with protective covers),
- two wireless Bluetooth technology
headphone sets with rechargeable
batteries,
- a 12 V charger with two outlets allowing the
simultaneous charging of two headphones.
1. Power switch
2. AV1 video input (yellow RCA socket)
3. Stereo audio input A (red and white
RCA sockets)
4. AV2 video input (yellow RCA socket)
5. Stereo audio input B (red and white
RCA sockets)
6. Selection of display in the left hand screen
(AV1 or AV2)
7. Selection of display in the right hand
screen (AV1 or AV2)
8. Connection indicator lamps for the
Bluetooth audio headphones (blue)
5
Fittings
99
3008_en_Chap05_amenagements_ed01-2015
1. Screen power switch
2. Display adjustment buttons
Each headphone set has a switch,
a connection indicator lamp (blue)
and a channel selector (A or B).
Operation
F With the engine running, connect your
portable system to the RCA connectors
(e.g. with AV1 on the left).
F Press the switch on the control panel,
the indicator lamp comes on and the AV1
indicator lamps come on.
F Make a long press on the switch, its
indicator lamp flashes in blue.
F Make a long press on the control panel
switch, the pairing with the headphone set
is complete when the blue indicator lamps
on the headphones and on the system are
on continuously.
F Repeat the operation for the other
headphone set.
F Press the screen switch if you have a video
source.
F Start playing your portable system.
The Multimedia system allows the
connection of a third Bluetooth
headphone set, not supplied.
If your seat is in the table position,
position a cover to avoid damaging the
screen.
These covers also conceal each
screen.
F It is possible at any time to modify the
source for the video display (using button 6
or 7 on the control panel: the indicator lamp
for the source selected comes on) as well
as the audio channel (using the selector on
the headphones).
Fittings
100
3008_en_Chap05_amenagements_ed01-2015
Rear armrest Ski ap
Opening
F Lower the rear armrest.
F Pull the flap handle downwards.
F Lower the flap.
F Load the objects from inside the boot.
F Lower the rear armrest for a more
comfortable position.
The armrest incorporates two cup holders.
Comfort and storage device for the rear
passengers.
Arrangement for storing and transporting long
objects.
Storage compartments
under the rear footwells
Depending on the configuration, the vehicle
has storage compartments under the footwells,
located forward of the outer rear seats. Access
is via clipped flaps with a handle A.
5
Fittings
101
3008_en_Chap05_amenagements_ed01-2015
Automatic mode
Pressing and releasing the control opens or
closes the blind completely. Pressing again
stops the movement.
Panoramic sunroof
Motorised blind
It has a blind that can be used to improve temperature and noise related comfort in the passenger
compartment.
With button B:
- lower the control to open the blind,
- raise the control to close the blind.
Manual mode
Maintaining pressure on the control opens or
closes the blind: movement stops if you release
the control. Pressure on the control in the
opposite direction reverses the movement.
Depending on version, the blind is opened and closed using:
- button A on the centre console,
- button B on the dashboard.
With button A:
- pull the control to open the blind,
- push the control to close the blind.
The control is operational with the ignition
on and for 45 seconds after switching off the
ignition.
Fittings
102
3008_en_Chap05_amenagements_ed01-2015
Safety anti-pinch
In automatic mode and at the end of its travel,
if the blind meets an obstacle while closing it
stops and moves back slightly.
Reinitialisation: after reconnecting the battery
or in the event of a fault while the blind is
moving, it may be necessary to reinitialise the
system:
F Operate the control until the blind is fully
closed or open.
F Continue to press for at least 3 seconds.
A slight movement of the blind will then be
noticeable, confirming the reinitialisation.
If the blind opens on its own while
closing, and immediately after it stops.
F Operate the control until the blind is
fully open.
F Operate the control until the blind is
fully closed.
The safety anti-pinch function is not
operational during these operations.
If the blind meets an obstacle during
operation, you must reverse the
movement of the blind.
When the driver operates the blind
control, they must ensure that nothing
and no one is preventing the correct
closing of the blind.
The driver must ensure that passengers
use the blind correctly.
Be aware of children when operating
the blind.
5
Fittings
103
3008_en_Chap05_amenagements_ed01-2015
Boot ttings
1. Load space cover
2. Hooks
3. 12 V accessory socket (120 W)
4. Rear seats folding controls
5. Adjustable boot
(3 position floor)
6. Stowing rings on the floor
7. Storage pockets
Fittings
104
3008_en_Chap05_amenagements_ed01-2015
Load space cover
To fold it:
F unhook the two cords,
F fold it concertina-style to the rear seats.
To remove it:
F fold the load space cover as described
above,
F unclip the fixings on the left and on the
right by pushing gently,
F place your hands as shown on the
illustration then pull the assembly towards
you.
This consists of three sections which can be
folded back on each other.
5
Fittings
105
3008_en_Chap05_amenagements_ed01-2015
The hooks can be used to secure shopping
bags.
Hooks
To store it at the bottom of the boot:
F remove the load space cover as described
above,
F place the floor at an angle,
F place the load space cover in its location
(recess marked A), at bottom of the boot,
F the load space cover will be protected
if you place the floor in the intermediate
position.
To put it back in place:
F take hold of the load space cover with both
hands then place it on its support,
F unfold it to the boot pillars,
F hook the two cords,
F if necessary, press on the top of the load
space cover, on the left and on the right, to
engage the fixings.
When changing a wheel
The hooks facilitate access to the spare
wheel, retaining the boot carpet by
means of the two cords.
Fittings
106
3008_en_Chap05_amenagements_ed01-2015
F Raise the boot carpet, hooking the
two cords on the hooks, then gain access
to the storage box.
Depending on the configuration, this has areas
for storing:
- a box of spare bulbs,
- a first aid kit,
- a tyre repair kit,
- two warning triangles,
- ...
Storage box
F To connect a 12 V accessory (max power:
120 W), remove the cap and connect an
appropriate adaptor.
F Turn the key to the ignition on position.
12 V accessory socket Luggage retaining net
Hooked onto the stowing rings on the movable
boot floor, the luggage retaining net available
as an accessory enables you to secure your
luggage.
Observe the loads indicated on the side of the
boot, in accordance with the position of the
movable floor.
For safety reasons in case of sharp braking, we
recommend that heavy objects are placed on
the floor as close as possible to the back of the
rear seats.
5
Fittings
107
3008_en_Chap05_amenagements_ed01-2015
Adjustable boot floor
This three position floor allows you to optimise
the volume of the boot by means of the guides
placed on the sides:
- High position (50 kg max): the floor is level
with the closed lower tailgate.
You can load objects while keeping an area
protected and isolated.
- Intermediate position (100 kg max): the
floor is level with the open lower tailgate.
You obtain a flat floor to the front seats
when the rear seats are in the retracted
position.
- Low position (150 kg max): maximum boot
volume.
To place and support the floor at an angle:
F From the high position, raise the floor
towards the load space cover.
F Do not hesitate to pass the two retractable
stops then place the floor back on these
two stops.
To change the height of the floor:
F Push the floor fully forwards then, with the
help of the support stops A, move the floor
to the position required.
The floor is equipped with four stowing rings
to secure your luggage, observing the loads
indicated (in the boot).
On certain versions, the adjustable boot
floor cannot be fitted in the low position.
Fittings
108
3008_en_Chap05_amenagements_ed01-2015
Rear side blinds
Fitted on the rear windows, these protect your
young children from the sun.
F Pull the blind by the central tab.
F Position the blind attachment on the hook.
6
Child safety
109
3008_en_Chap06_securite-enfants_ed01-2015
General points relating to child seats
Although one of PEUGEOT main criteria when designing your vehicle, the safety of your children
also depends on you.
* The regulations on carrying children are
specific to each country. Refer to the
legislation in force in your country.
For maximum safety, please observe the
following recommendations:
- in accordance with European regulations,
all children under the age of 12 or less
than one and a half metres tall must
travel in approved child seats suited to
their weight, on seats fitted with a seat
belt or ISOFIX mountings*,
- statistically, the safest seats in your
vehicle for carrying children are the
rear seats,
- a child weighing less than 9 kg must
travel in the rearward facing position
both in the front and in the rear.
PEUGEOT recommends that children
should travel in the outer rear seats of
your vehicle:
- rearward facing up to the age of 3,
- forward facing over the age of 3.
Child safety
110
3008_en_Chap06_securite-enfants_ed01-2015
Forward facing
When a forward facing child seat is installed on
the front passenger seat, adjust the vehicle
seat to the fully back and highest position,
with the backrest straightened. Leave the
passenger's airbag active.
Rearward facing
When a rearward facing child seat is installed
on the front passenger seat, adjust the
vehicle seat to the fully back and highest
position, with the backrest straightened.
The passenger's airbag must be deactivated.
Otherwise, the child risks being seriously
injured or killed if the airbag is deployed.
Child seat at the front*
Ensure that the seat belt is properly
tightened.
For child seats with a support leg,
ensure that this is in firm and steady
contact with the floor. If necessary,
adjust the passenger's seat.
Passenger seat in the fully back and
highest position.
* Refer to the legislation in force in your country
before installing a child seat on this seating
position.
6
Child safety
111
3008_en_Chap06_securite-enfants_ed01-2015
Passenger airbag OFF
For information on deactivating the
passenger's front airbag, refer to the
"Airbags" section.
Never install a rearward facing child
restraint system on a seat protected by
an active front airbag. This could cause
the death of the child or serious injury.
Deactivating the passenger's front airbag
The warning label present on both sides of the
passenger's sun visor repeats this advice. In
line with current legislation, the following tables
contain this warning in all of the languages
required.
AR
BG
НИКОГА НЕ инсталирайте детско столче на седалка с АКТИВИРАНА предна ВЪЗДУШНА ВЪЗГЛАВНИЦА. Това може да причини
СМЪРТ или СЕРИОЗНО НАРАНЯВАНЕ на детето.
CS
NIKDY neumisťujte dětské zádržné zařízení orientované směrem dozadu na sedadlo chráněné AKTIVOVANÝM čelním AIRBAGEM. Hrozí
nebezpečí SMRTI DÍTĚTE nebo VÁŽNÉHO ZRANĚNÍ.
DA
Brug ALDRIG en bagudvendt barnestol på et sæde, der er beskyttet af en AKTIV AIRBAG. BARNET risikerer at blive ALVORLIGT
KVÆSTET eller DRÆBT.
DE
Montieren Sie auf einem Sitz mit AKTIVIERTEM Front-Airbag NIEMALS einen Kindersitz oder eine Babyschale entgegen der
Fahrtrichtung, das Kind könnte schwere oder sogar tödliche Verletzungen erleiden.
EL
Μη χρησιμοποιείτε ΠΟΤΕ παιδικό κάθισμα με την πλάτη του προς το εμπρός μέρος του αυτοκινήτου, σε μια θέση που προστατεύεται από
ΜΕΤΩΠΙΚΟ αερόσακο που είναι ΕΝΕΡΓΟΣ. Αυτό μπορεί να έχει σαν συνέπεια το ΘΑΝΑΤΟ ή το ΣΟΒΑΡΟ ΤΡΑΥΜΑΤΙΣΜΟ του ΠΑΙΔΙΟΥ
EN
NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the
CHILD can occur
ES
NO INSTALAR NUNCA un sistema de retención para niños de espaldas al sentido de la marcha en un asiento protegido mediante un
AIRBAG frontal ACTIVADO, ya que podría causar lesiones GRAVES o incluso la MUERTE del niño.
ET
Ärge MITTE KUNAGI paigaldage "seljaga sõidusuunas" lapseistet juhi kõrvalistmele, mille ESITURVAPADI on AKTIVEERITUD.
Turvapadja avanemine võib last TÕSISELT või ELUOHTLIKULT vigastada.
FI
ÄLÄ KOSKAAN aseta lapsen turvaistuinta selkä ajosuuntaan istuimelle, jonka edessä suojana on käyttöön aktivoitu TURVATYYNY. Sen
laukeaminen voi aiheuttaa LAPSEN KUOLEMAN tai VAKAVAN LOUKKAANTUMISEN.
FR
NE JAMAIS installer de système de retenue pour enfants faisant face vers l’arrière sur un siège protégé par un COUSSIN GONFLABLE
frontal ACTIVÉ.
Cela peut provoquer la MORT de l’ENFANT ou le BLESSER GRAVEMENT
HR
NIKADA ne postavljati dječju sjedalicu leđima u smjeru vožnje na sjedalo zaštićeno UKLJUČENIM prednjim ZRAČNIM JASTUKOM. To bi
moglo uzrokovati SMRT ili TEŠKU OZLJEDU djeteta.
HU
SOHA ne használjon menetiránynak háttal beszerelt gyermekülést AKTIVÁLT (BEKAPCSOLT) FRONTLÉGZSÁKKAL védett ülésen. Ez a
gyermek HALÁLÁT vagy SÚLYOS SÉRÜLÉSÉT okozhatja.
IT
NON installare MAI seggiolini per bambini posizionati in senso contrario a quello di marcia su un sedile protetto da un AIRBAG frontale
ATTIVATO. Ciò potrebbe provocare la MORTE o FERITE GRAVI al bambino.
Child safety
112
3008_en_Chap06_securite-enfants_ed01-2015
6
LT
NIEKADA neįrenkite vaiko prilaikymo priemonės su atgal atgręžtu vaiku ant sėdynės, kuri saugoma VEIKIANČIOS priekinės ORO
PAGALVĖS. Išsiskleidus oro pagalvei vaikas gali būti MIRTINAI arba SUNKIAI TRAUMUOTAS.
LV
NEKAD NEuzstādiet uz aizmuguri vērstu bērnu sēdeklīti priekšējā pasažiera sēdvietā, kurā ir AKTIVIZĒTS priekšējais DROŠĪBAS GAISA
SPILVENS.
Tas var izraisīt BĒRNA NĀVI vai radīt NOPIETNUS IEVAINOJUMUS.
MT
Qatt m’ghandek thalli tifel/tifla marbut f’siggu dahru lejn l-Airbag attiva, ghaliex tista’ tikkawza korriment serju jew anke mewt lit-tifel/tifla
NL
Plaats NOOIT een kinderzitje met de rug in de rijrichting op een zitplaats waarvan de AIRBAG is INGESCHAKELD. Bij het afgaan van de
airbag kan het KIND LEVENSGEVAARLIJK GEWOND RAKEN
NO
Installer ALDRI et barnesete med ryggen mot kjøreretningen i et sete som er beskyttet med en frontal AKTIVERT KOLLISJONSPUTE,
BARNET risikerer å bli DREPT eller HARDT SKADET.
PL
NIGDY nie instalować fotelika dziecięcego w pozycji "tyłem do kierunku jazdy" na siedzeniu wyposażonym w CZOŁOWĄ PODUSZKĘ
POWIETRZNĄ w stanie AKTYWNYM. Może to doprowadzić do ŚMIERCI DZIECKA lub spowodować u niego POWAŻNE OBRAŻENIA
CIAŁA.
PT
NUNCA instale um sistema de retenção para crianças de costas para a estrada num banco protegido por um AIRBAG frontal ACTIVADO.
Esta instalação poderá provocar FERIMENTOS GRAVES ou a MORTE da CRIANÇA.
RO
Nu instalati NICIODATA un sistem de retinere pentru copii, dispus cu spatele in directia de mers, pe un loc din vehicul protejat cu AIRBAG
frontal ACTIVAT. Aceasta ar putea provoca MOARTEA COPILULUI sau RANIREA lui GRAVA.
RU
ВО ВСЕХ СЛУЧАЯХ ЗАПРЕЩАЕТСЯ использовать обращенное назад детское удерживающее устройство на сиденье,
защищенном ФУНКЦИОНИРУЮЩЕЙ ПОДУШКОЙ БЕЗОПАСНОСТИ, установленной перед этим сиденьем.
Это может привести к ГИБЕЛИ РЕБЕНКА или НАНЕСЕНИЮ ЕМУ СЕРЬЕЗНЫХ ТЕЛЕСНЫХ ПОВРЕЖДЕНИЙ
SK
NIKDY neinštalujte detské zádržné zariadenie orientované smerom dozadu na sedadlo chránené AKTIVOVANÝM čelným AIRBAGOM.
Mohlo by dôjsť k SMRTEĽNÉMU alebo VÁŽNEMU PORANENIU DIEŤAŤA.
SL
NIKOLI ne nameščajte otroškega sedeža s hrbtom v smeri vožnje, če je VARNOSTNA BLAZINA pred sprednjim sopotnikovim sedežem
AKTIVIRANA. Takšna namestitev lahko povzroči SMRT OTROKA ali HUDE POŠKODBE.
SR
NIKADA ne koristite dečje sedište koje se okreće unazad na sedištu zaštićenim AKTIVNIM VAZDUŠNIM JASTUKOM ispred njega, jer
mogu nastupiti SMRT ili OZBILJNA POVREDA DETETA.
SV
Passagerarkrockkudden fram MÅSTE vara avaktiverad om en bakåtvänd bilbarnstol installeras på denna plats. Annars riskerar barnet att
DÖDAS eller SKADAS ALLVARLIGT.
TR
KESİNLKLE HAVA YASTIĞI AKTİF olan ön koltuğa yüzü arkaya dönük bir çocuk koltuğu yerleştirmeyiniz. Bu ÇOCUĞUN ÖLMESİNE veya
ÇOK AĞIR YARALANMASINA sebep olabilir.
Child safety
113
3008_en_Chap06_securite-enfants_ed01-2015
Child safety
114
3008_en_Chap06_securite-enfants_ed01-2015
Child seat at the rear
Rearward facing
When a rearward facing child seat is installed
on a rear passenger seat, move the vehicle's
front seat forward and straighten the backrest
so that the rearward facing child seat does not
touch the vehicle's front seat.
Forward facing
When a forward facing child seat is installed
on a rear passenger seat, move the vehicle's
front seat forward and straighten the backrest
so that the legs of the child in the forward
facing child seat do not touch the vehicle's front
seat.
Ensure that the seat belt is correctly
tensioned.
For child seats with a support leg,
ensure that this is in firm contact with
the floor. If necessary, adjust the front
seat of the vehicle.
6
Child safety
115
3008_en_Chap06_securite-enfants_ed01-2015
Installing a child seat with a support leg
At the bottom of the
storage compartment
Away from the storage
compartment area
Care must be taken when installing a child seat
with a support leg in the vehicle. In particular
you should look for the presence of a storage
compartment below the rear seat footwells.
Do not place the support leg on the
storage compartment cover; it might
break in a serious impact. Where the
adjustments of the support leg allow it,
we suggest two other possibilities for
installation.
The centre rear seat does not have
a storage compartment below the
footwell. You can therefore easily fit a
child seat with a support leg, whether
installed with the ISOFIX mountings or
using the 3 point seat belt.
If you cannot fit the support leg in
the way described in one of these
two procedures, you should not fit a
child seat with support leg to this seat.
If the support leg is long enough, you can
adjust it so that it contact the bottom of the
storage compartment. Remove all objects from
the storage compartment before installing the
support leg.
Another possibility, if the support leg is long
enough and can be inclined sufficiently (always
by following the recommendations given in the
installation instructions for the child seat), is
to position the support leg so that it contacts
the floor away from the storage compartment.
Adjust the longitudinal position of the front
or rear seat to obtain a satisfactory position
for the support leg away from the storage
compartment.
Child safety
116
3008_en_Chap06_securite-enfants_ed01-2015
Child seats recommended by PEUGEOT
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
L1
"RÖMER/BRITAX Baby-Safe Plus".
Installed in the rearward-facing position.
L2
"RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX".
Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg
L5
"KLIPPAN Optima".
From the age of approximately 6 years
(22 kg), the booster is used on its own.
L6
"RÖMER KIDFIX"
Can be secured using the vehicle's
ISOFIX mountings. The child is
restrained by the seat belt.
PEUGEOT offers a range of recommended child seats which are secured using a three point seat belt.
6
Child safety
117
3008_en_Chap06_securite-enfants_ed01-2015
Installing child seats attached using the seat belt
a: universal child seat, child seat that can be installed in all vehicles using a seat belt.
b: group 0, from birth to 10 kg. Shell seats and baby carriers cannot be installed in the front passenger seat.
c: refer to the legislation in force in your country before installing your child on this seat.
U: seat suitable for the installation of a child seat secured using a seat belt and universally approved, rearward facing and/or forward facing.
U (R): as for U, with the vehicle's seat adjusted to the highest position and as far back as possible.
L-: only the child seats indicated can be installed on the seat concerned (depending on local legislation).
X: seat position not suitable for installation of a child seat for the weight class indicated.
In accordance with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing child seats secured using a seat belt and universally approved (a)
in accordance with the weight of the child and the seat in the vehicle.
* Child seats with a support leg should be fitted to your vehicle with care. See "Fitting a child seat with a support leg" for more information.
Weight of the child and indicative age
Seat
Under 13 kg
(groups 0 (b) and 0+)
Up to approx 1 year
From 9 to 18 kg
(group 1)
1 to 3 years approx
From 15 to 25 kg
(group 2)
3 to 6 years approx
From 22 to 36 kg
(group 3)
6 to 10 years approx
Front passenger seat (c)
with height adjuster
U (R) U (R) U (R) U (R)
Front passenger seat (c)
without height adjuster
X X X X
Outer rear seats U* U* U* U*
Centre rear seat L1 L2 L5, L6 L5, L6
Child safety
118
3008_en_Chap06_securite-enfants_ed01-2015
"ISOFIX" mountings
The ISOFIX mountings are three rings for each
seat:
- two rings A, located between the vehicle seat
back and cushion, indicated by a marking,
This ISOFIX mounting system ensures fast,
reliable and safe fitting of the child seat in
your vehicle.
The ISOFIX child seats are fitted with two
latches which are secured easily on the two
rings A.
Some also have an upper strap (or top tether)
which is attached to ring B.
To secure the child seat to the TOP TETHER:
- remove and stow the head restraint before
installing the child seat on this seat (refit it
after the child seat has been removed),
- remove the TOP TETHER cover by pulling
at its cut-out,
- pass the child seat strap behind the seat
backrest, centred between the holes for the
head restraint rods,
- secure the upper strap fixing to the ring B,
- tighten the upper strap.
Your vehicle has been approved in accordance with the latest ISOFIX regulations.
The seats, represented below, are fitted with regulation ISOFIX mountings:
- a ring B, located under a cover on the back
of the top of the seat backrest, referred to as
the TOP TETHER for fixing the upper strap.
Its position is indicated by a marking.
For information on the possibilities
for fitting ISOFIX child seats to your
vehicle, refer to the table of seating
positions.
The incorrect installation of a child seat
in a vehicle compromises the child's
protection in the event of an accident.
Observe strictly the fitting instructions
provided with the child seat.
Located on the back of the seat backrest, the
top tether is used to secure the upper strap of
child seats that have one. This device limits
forward tipping of the child seat, in the event of
a front impact.
6
Child safety
119
3008_en_Chap06_securite-enfants_ed01-2015
ISOFIX child seat
This child seat can also be used on seats which are not fitted with ISOFIX mountings.
In this case, it must be attached to the vehicle seat using the three point seat belt.
Adjust the front seat of the vehicle so that the child's feet do not touch the backrest.
Follow the instructions for fitting the child seat given in the seat manufacturer's installation guide.
Recommended by PEUGEOT and approved for your vehicle
ISOFIX child seat with TOP TETHER
RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX
(size category B1)
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
Installed only in the forward facing position.
Is attached to the rings A, as well as the ring B, referred to as the TOP TETHER, using an upper strap.
Three seat body angles: sitting, reclining, lying.
Child safety
120
3008_en_Chap06_securite-enfants_ed01-2015
Locations for installing ISOFIX child seats
IUF: seat suitable for the installation of an Isofix Universal seat, Forward facing secured using the upper strap.
IL-SU: seat suitable for the installation of an Isofix Semi-Universal seat either:
- rearward facing fitted with an upper strap or a support leg,
- forward facing fitted with a support leg,
- a shell seat fitted with an upper strap or a support leg.
For advice on securing the upper strap refer to the section on "Isofix mountings".
X: seat not suitable for the installation of a child seat or shell for the weight group indicated.
In accordance with European Regulations, this table indicates the options for installing ISOFIX child seats on seats in the vehicle fitted with ISOFIX
mountings.
In the case of universal and semi-universal ISOFIX child seats, the ISOFIX size category, determined by a letter from A to G, is indicated on the child
seat next to the ISOFIX logo.
* Child seats with a support leg should be fitted to your vehicle with care. Refer to the section on fitting a child seat with a support leg.
Weight of the child / indicative age
Less than 10 kg
(group 0)
Up to approx.
6 months
Less than 10 kg
(group 0)
Less than 13 kg
(group 0+)
Up to approx. 1 year
From 9 to 18 kg (group 1)
From approx. 1 to 3 years
Type of ISOFIX child seat Shell rearward facing rearward facing forward facing
ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1
Front passenger seat X X X X
Outer rear seats X IL-SU* IL-SU*
IUF*
IL-SU*
Centre rear seat X X X X
6
Child safety
121
3008_en_Chap06_securite-enfants_ed01-2015
Recommendations
The incorrect installation of a child seat in a
vehicle compromises the child's protection in
the event of an accident.
Check that there is no seat belt or seat belt
buckle under the child seat as this could
destabilise it.
Remember to fasten the seat belts or the
child seat harnesses keeping the slack in
relation to the child's body to a minimum,
even for short journeys.
For the installation of a child seat using a seat
belt, ensure that this is well tensioned on the
child seat and that it is holding the child seat
firmly against the seat of your vehicle. If your
front passenger seat is adjustable, move it
forward if necessary.
At the rear seats, always leave sufficient
space between the front seat and:
- a rearward facing child seat,
- the feet of a child seated in a forward
facing child seat.
For this, move the front seat forward and if
necessary straighten its backrest.
For optimum installation of the forward facing
child seat, ensure that the back of the child
seat is as close as possible to the backrest of
the vehicle's seat, or in contact if possible.
The head restraint must be removed before
installing a child seat with a backrest on the
passenger seat.
Ensure that the head restraint is stowed or
attached securely so that it is not thrown around
the vehicle in the event of sharp braking.
Refit the head restraint as soon as the child
seat is removed.
Children at the front
The legislation on carrying a child on the front
passenger seat is specific to each country.
Refer to the legislation in force in the country
in which you are driving.
Deactivate the passenger's front airbag when
a rearward facing child seat is installed on
the front passenger seat. Otherwise, the child
would risk being seriously injured or killed if
the airbag were deployed.
Installing a booster
cushion
Child seats
The chest part of the seat belt must be
positioned on the child's shoulder without
touching the neck.
Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt
passes correctly over the child's thighs.
PEUGEOT recommends the use of a booster
seat which has a back, fitted with a seat belt
guide at shoulder level.
As a safety precaution, do not leave:
- one or more children alone and
unsupervised in a vehicle,
- a child or an animal in a vehicle which
is exposed to the sun, with the windows
closed,
- the keys within reach of children inside
the vehicle.
To prevent accidental opening of the doors,
use the child lock.
Take care not to open the rear windows by
more than one third.
To protect young children from the rays of the
sun, fit side blinds on the rear windows.
Child safety
122
3008_en_Chap06_securite-enfants_ed01-2015
Manual child lock
Locking
F Turn the red control one eighth of a turn
using the ignition key as shown in the label
on the door. Check that the lock is on.
Electric child lock
Switching on
F With the ignition on, press this button.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on,
accompanied by a message to confirm that the
child lock is on.
This indicator lamp remains on until the child
lock is switched off.
It is still possible to open the doors from the
outside and operate the rear electric windows
from the driver's control panel.
Unlocking
F Turn the red control one eighth of a turn
using the ignition key.
Switching off
F With the ignition on, press this button again.
The indicator lamp in the button goes off,
accompanied by a message to confirm that the
child lock is off.
This indicator lamp remains off while the child
lock is switched off.
Mechanical system to prevent opening of the
rear door using its interior control.
The control is located on the edge of each rear
door.
Remote control system to prevent opening of
the rear doors using their interior controls and
use of the rear electric windows.
This system is independent and in no
circumstances does it take the place of
the central locking control.
Check the state of the child lock each
time you switch on the ignition.
Always remove the key from the ignition
when leaving the vehicle, even for a
short time.
In the event of a serious impact, the
electric child lock is switched off
automatically to permit the exit of the
rear passengers.
To know whether your vehicle has
an electric child lock, check for the
absence of a label indicating the
presence of the manual child lock
control (see the corresponding section).
7
Safety
123
3008_en_Chap07_securite_ed01-2015
Direction indicators
F Lower the lighting control stalk fully when
moving to the left.
F Raise the lighting control stalk fully when
moving to the right.
Hazard warning lamps
F Tilt or press button A, the direction
indicators flash.
They can operate with the ignition off.
Automatic operation of
hazard warning lamps
When braking in an emergency, depending on
the deceleration, the hazard warning lamps
come on automatically.
They switch off automatically the first time you
accelerate.
F You can also switch them off by pressing
the button.
Horn
F Press one of the spokes of the steering
wheel.
Audible warning to alert other road users to an
imminent danger.
Three ashes
Move the stalk briefly upwards or downwards,
without going beyond the point of resistance;
the corresponding direction indicators will
flash 3 times.
If you forget to cancel the
direction indicators for more than
twenty seconds, the volume of the
audible signal will increase if the speed
is above 40 mph (60 km/h).
A visual warning by means of the direction
indicators to alert other road users to a vehicle
breakdown, towing or accident.
This function can be used at any speed, but it
is particularly useful for changing lane on fast
roads.
Safety
124
3008_en_Chap07_securite_ed01-2015
Electronic stability control (ESC)
Definitions
Anti-slip regulation (ASR)
The ASR system (also known as Traction
Control) optimises traction in order to limit
wheel slip by acting on the brakes of the driving
wheels and on the engine. It also improves
the directional stability of the vehicle on
acceleration.
Dynamic stability control (DSC)
If there is a difference between the path
followed by the vehicle and that required by
the driver, the DSC monitors each wheel and
automatically acts on the brake of one or more
wheels and on the engine to return the vehicle
to the required path, within the limits of the laws
of physics.
Emergency braking assistance
(EBA)
In an emergency, this system enables you to
reach the optimum braking pressure more
quickly and therefore reduce the stopping
distance.
It is triggered according to the speed at which
the brake pedal is pressed. This is felt by a
reduction in the resistance of the pedal and an
increase in the effectiveness of the braking.
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
and electronic brake force
distribution (EBFD)
This system improves the stability and
manoeuvrability of your vehicle when braking
and contributes towards improved control in
corners, in particular on poor or slippery road
surfaces.
The ABS prevents wheel lock in the event of
emergency braking.
The electronic brake force distribution system
manages the braking pressure wheel by wheel.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) incorporating the following systems:
- anti-lock braking system (ABS) and the electronic brake force distribution (EBFD),
- emergency braking assistance (EBA),
- wheel anti-slip regulation (ASR) or traction control,
- dynamic stability control (DSC).
7
Safety
125
3008_en_Chap07_securite_ed01-2015
Dynamic stability control (DSC)
and anti-slip regulation (ASR)
This is indicated by flashing of this
warning lamp in the instrument
panel.
Activation
These systems are activated automatically
each time the vehicle is started.
As soon as they detect a problem of grip or
trajectory, these systems act on the operation if
the engine and brakes.
Operation
When this warning lamp comes on,
accompanied by an audible signal
and a message, it indicates that
there is a fault with the ABS, which
could cause loss of control of the vehicle when
braking.
When this warning lamp comes on,
coupled with the STOP warning
lamp, accompanied by an audible
signal and a message, it indicates
that there is a fault with the electronic brake
force distribution (EBFD), which could cause
loss of control of the vehicle when braking.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
In both cases, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
and electronic brake force
distribution (EBFD)
In emergency braking, press
very firmly without releasing the
pressure.
Normal operation of the ABS may make
itself felt by slight vibrations of the brake
pedal.
When changing wheels (tyres and rims),
make sure that these are approved for
your vehicle.
Safety
126
3008_en_Chap07_securite_ed01-2015
Deactivation
In exceptional conditions (starting a vehicle
which is bogged down, stuck in snow, on soft
ground...), it may be advisable to deactivate
the DSC and ASR, so that the wheels can turn
freely and regain grip.
F Press this button.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
The DSC and ASR systems no longer act
on the operation of the engine and on the
brakes in the event of a involuntary change of
trajectory.
Reactivation
The systems are reactivated automatically each
time the ignition is switched back on or from
30 mph (50 km/h).
Operating fault
Illumination of this warning lamp
and the lamp in the deactivation
button, accompanied by an audible
signal and a message, indicate a
fault with the system.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop to have the system checked.
Below 30 mph (50 km/h), you can reactivate
them manually:
F Press this button again.
The indicator lamp in the button goes off.
DSC/ASR
The DSC and ASR systems offer
increased safety in normal driving, but
they should not encourage the driver to
take extra risks or drive at high speed.
It is in conditions of reduced grip (rain,
snow, black ice) that the risk of loss of
grip increases. It is therefore important
for your safety to keep the DSC and
ASR systems activated in all conditions,
and particularly in difficult conditions.
The correct operation of these
systems depends on observation of
the manufacturer's recommendations
regarding as much the wheels (tyres
and rims), braking and electronic
components as the assembly and repair
procedures used by PEUGEOT dealers.
To benefit in full from the effectiveness
of the DSC and ASR systems in wintry
conditions, the vehicle must be fitted
with four snow tyres, allowing the the
vehicle to retain neutral handling on the
road.
Reactivate the systems as soon as the
level of grip permits.
After an impact, have these systems
checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
7
Safety
127
3008_en_Chap07_securite_ed01-2015
Grip control
Standard mode (ESC)
F Place the dial in this position.
Snow mode
Special patented traction control system which
improves traction on snow, mud and sand.
This system, the operation of which has been
optimised for each situation, allows you to
manoeuvre in most conditions of poor grip
(encountered during touring use).
Mode calibrated for a low level of wheel spin,
based on the different levels of grip normally
encountered on the road.
Mode which adapts its strategy to the
conditions of grip encountered for each of the
two front wheels on moving off.
(mode active up to 30 mph (50 km/h))
F Place the dial in this position.
The accelerator pedal should be
pressed sufficiently to allow the
system to use the power of the engine.
Operation at high engine speeds is
completely normal.
Every time the ignition is switched off,
the system automatically resets to this
mode.
A five-position selector allows you to choose
the setting best suited to the driving conditions
encountered.
An indicator lamp associated with each mode
comes on to confirm your choice.
Associated with all-season M+S (Mud
and Snow) tyres, this system offers a
compromise between safety, adhesion
and traction.
Safety
128
3008_en_Chap07_securite_ed01-2015
Mud mode
Mode which, when moving off allows
considerable spin on the wheel with the least
grip to optimise clearing of the mud and regain
grip. At the same time, the wheel with the most
grip is controlled in such a way as to pass as
much torque as possible.
When moving, the system optimises wheel spin
to respond to the driver's requirements as fully
as possible.
(mode active up to 50 mph (80 km/h))
F Place the dial in this position.
Sand mode
Mode which allows little spin on the two driving
wheels at the same time to allow the vehicle to
move forward and limit the risks of getting stuck
in the sand.
(mode active up to 75 mph (120 km/h))
F Place the dial in this position.
You can deactivate certain
functions of the ESC (ASR
and DSC) by turning the dial
to the "OFF" position.
Driving advice
Your vehicle is designed principally to
drive on tarmac roads but it allows you
to drive on other less passable terrain
occasionally.
However, it does not permit off-road
driving such as:
- crossing and driving on terrain
which could damage the underbody
or strip away components (fuel
pipe, fuel cooler, ...) due to
obstacles or stones in particular,
- driving on terrain with steep
gradients and poor grip,
- crossing a stream.
Do not use the other modes on sand as
the vehicle may become stuck.
These functions are reactivated
automatically from 30 mph (50 km/h)
or every time the ignition is switched
back on.
7
Safety
129
3008_en_Chap07_securite_ed01-2015
Height adjustment
F To adjust the anchorage point, squeeze the
control A and slide it until you find a notch.
Front seat belts not fastened /
unfastened warning lamp
Fastening
F Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in the
buckle.
F Check that the seat belt is fastened
correctly by pulling the strap.
When the ignition is switched on, this
warning lamp comes on in the seat
belt and passenger's front airbag
warning lamps display, if the driver
and/or the front passenger has not fastened
their seat belt.
From approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) this warning
lamp flashes for two minutes accompanied by
an audible signal. Once these two minutes have
elapsed, this warning lamp remains on until the driver
and/or the front passenger fastens their seat belt.
Unfastening
F Press the red button on the buckle.
F Guide the seat belt as it reels in.
Seat belts
Front seat belts
The front seat belts are fitted with a
pretensioning and force limiting system.
This system improves safety in the front
seats in the event of a front or side impact.
Depending on the severity of the impact, the
pretensioning system instantly tightens the seat
belts against the body of the occupants.
The pretensioning seat belts are active when
the ignition is on.
The force limiter reduces the pressure of the
seat belt on the chest of the occupant, so
improving their protection.
Safety
130
3008_en_Chap07_securite_ed01-2015
1. Front and/or rear seat belts not fastened /
unfastened warning lamp.
2. Front left seat belt warning lamp.
3. Front right seat belt warning lamp.
4. Rear right seat belt warning lamp.
5. Rear centre seat belt warning lamp.
6. Rear left seat belt warning lamp.
Seat belts not fastened /
unfastened warning lamps
display
Rear seat belts
The rear seats are each fitted with a three-point
inertia reel seat belt with force limiter (with the
exception of the centre rear seat).
Seat belt unfastened warning
lamp
This warning lamp comes on in
the seat belt and passenger's front
airbag warning lamps display,
when one or more rear passengers
unfasten their seat belt.
Fastening
F Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in the
buckle.
F Check that the seat belt is fastened
correctly by pulling the strap.
Unfastening
F Press the red button on the buckle.
F Guide the seat belt as it reels in.
The corresponding warning lamp 2 or 3 comes
on in red on the seat belt and passenger's front
airbag warning lamps display if the seat belt is
not fastened or is unfastened.
When the ignition is switched on, with the
engine running or when the vehicle is moving at
less than 12 mph (20 km/h), the corresponding
warning lamps 4, 5 and 6 come on in red for
approximately 30 seconds, if the seat belt is not
fastened.
When the vehicle is moving at more than
12 mph (20 km/h), the corresponding warning
lamp 4, 5 or 6 comes on in red, accompanied
by an audible signal and a message in the
multifunction screen, if a rear passenger has
unfastened their seat belt.
Seat belt unfastened warning
lamps display
From approximately 12 mph (20 km/h), this warning
lamp flashes for two minutes accompanied by
an audible signal. Once these two minutes have
elapsed, this warning lamp remains on until the one
or more rear passengers fasten their seat belt.
7
Safety
131
3008_en_Chap07_securite_ed01-2015
The driver must ensure that passengers use
the seat belts correctly and that they are all
fastened before setting off.
Wherever you are seated in the vehicle,
always fasten your seat belt, even for short
journeys.
Do not interchange the seat belt buckles as
they will not fulfil their role fully.
The seat belts are fitted with an inertia reel
permitting automatic adjustment of the length
of the strap to your size. The seat belt is
stowed automatically when not in use.
Before and after use, ensure that the seat belt
is reeled in correctly.
The lower part of the strap must be positioned
as low as possible on the pelvis.
The upper part must be positioned in the
hollow of the shoulder.
The inertia reels are fitted with an automatic
locking device which comes into operation in
the event of a collision, emergency braking
or if the vehicle rolls over. You can release
the device by pulling the strap firmly and then
releasing it so that it reels in slightly.
In order to be effective, a seat belt must:
- be tightened as close to the body as
possible,
- be pulled in front of you with a smooth
movement, checking that it does not
twist,
- be used to restrain only one person,
- not bear any trace of cuts or fraying,
- not be converted or modified to avoid
affecting its performance.
In the event of an impact
Depending on the nature and seriousness
of the impact, the pretensioning device may
be deployed before and independently of the
airbags. Deployment of the pretensioners
is accompanied by a slight discharge of
harmless smoke and a noise, due to the
activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge
incorporated in the system.
In all cases, the airbag warning lamp comes
on.
Following an impact, have the seat belts
system checked, and if necessary replaced,
by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Recommendations for children
Use a suitable child seat if the passenger is
less than 12 years old or shorter than one and
a half metres.
Never use the same seat belt to secure more
than one person.
Never allow a child to travel on your lap.
For more information on child seats, refer to
the corresponding section.
In accordance with current safety regulations,
for all repairs on your vehicle's seat belts, go
to a qualified workshop with the skills and
equipment needed, which a PEUGEOT dealer
is able to provide.
Have your seat belts checked regularly by a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop,
particularly if the straps show signs of
damage.
Clean the seat belt straps with soapy water or
a textile cleaning product, sold by PEUGEOT
dealers.
After folding or moving a seat or rear bench
seat, ensure that the seat belt is positioned
and reeled in correctly.
Advice
Safety
132
3008_en_Chap07_securite_ed01-2015
Airbags
Front airbags
Deployment
The airbags are deployed, except the passenger's
front airbag if it is deactivated, in the event of a
serious front impact to all or part of the front impact
zone A, in the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on
a horizontal plane and directed from the front to the
rear of the vehicle.
The front airbag inflates between the thorax and
head of the front occupant of the vehicle and the
steering wheel, driver's side, and the dashboard,
passenger's side to cushion their forward movement.
Impact detection zones
A. Front impact zone.
B. Side impact zone.
General information
System designed to contribute towards improving
the safety of the occupants (with the exception of
the rear centre passenger) in the event of violent
collisions. The airbags supplement the action of
the seat belts fitted with force limiters (all except
the centre rear passenger belt).
If a collision occurs, the electronic detectors
record and analyse the front and side impacts
sustained in the impact detection zones:
- in the case of a serious impact, the airbags
are deployed instantly and contribute towards
better protection of the occupants of the
vehicle (with the exception of the rear centre
passenger); immediately after the impact,
the airbags deflate rapidly so that they do not
hinder visibility or the exit of the occupants,
- in the case of a minor or rear impact or in
certain roll-over conditions, the airbags
may not be deployed; the seat belt alone
contributes towards ensuring your protection
in these situations.
System which contributes towards improving the
protection of the the driver and front passenger
in the event of a serious front impact in order to
limit the risk of injury to the head and thorax.
The driver's airbag is fitted in the centre of the
steering wheel; the front passenger's airbag is
fitted in the dashboard above the glove box.
Deployment of one or more of the
airbags is accompanied by a slight
emission of smoke and a noise, due
to the activation of the pyrotechnic
cartridge incorporated in the system.
This smoke is not harmful, but sensitive
individuals may experience slight
irritation.
The noise of detonation related to the
deployment of one or more airbags may
result in a slight loss of hearing for a
short time.
The airbags do not operate when the
ignition is switched off.
This equipment will only deploy once.
If a second impact occurs (during the
same or a subsequent accident), the
airbag will not be deployed again.
7
Safety
133
3008_en_Chap07_securite_ed01-2015
Operating fault
If this warning lamp comes on,
accompanied by an audible
warning and a message, contact
a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop without delay to have the system
checked. The airbags may no longer be
deployed in the event of a serious impact.
Reactivation
When you remove the rearward facing child
seat, with the ignition off, turn the switch to
the "ON" position to reactivate the airbag and
so assure the safety of your front passenger in
the event of an impact.
When switching the ignition on,
this warning lamp comes on in the
seat belt and passenger's front
airbag warning lamps display for
approximately one minute, to signal
that the passenger's front airbag is
activated.
On switching on the ignition, this
warning lamp comes on in the
instrument panel and/or in the seat
belt and passenger's front airbag
warning lamps display. It stays on
until the airbag is reactivated.
Deactivation
Only the passenger's front airbag can be
deactivated.
F With the ignition off, insert the key in the
passenger airbag deactivation switch.
F Turn it to the "OFF" position.
F Then, remove the key keeping the switch in
the new position.
To assure the safety of your child,
the passenger's front airbag must be
deactivated when you install a rearward
facing child seat on the front passenger
seat.
Otherwise, the child would risk being
seriously injured or killed if the airbag
were deployed.
Safety
134
3008_en_Chap07_securite_ed01-2015
Lateral airbags
System which contributes towards improving
the protection of the driver and front passenger
in the event of a serious side impact in order to
limit the risk of injury to the chest.
Each lateral airbag is fitted in the front, in the
outer side of the seat back frame.
Deployment
The lateral airbags are deployed unilaterally in
the event of a serious side impact applied to all
or part of the side impact zone B, perpendicular
to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a
horizontal plane and directed from the outside
towards the inside of the vehicle.
The lateral airbag inflates between the front
occupant of the vehicle and the corresponding
door panel.
Curtain airbags
System which contributes towards improving
the protection of the driver and passengers
(with the exception of the rear centre
passenger) in the event of a serious side
impact in order to limit the risk of injury to the
side of the head.
Each curtain airbag is built into the pillars and
the upper passenger compartment area.
Deployment
The curtain airbag is deployed at the same
time as the corresponding lateral airbag in the
event of a serious side impact applied to all or
part of the side impact zone B, perpendicular
to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a
horizontal plane and directed from the outside
towards the inside of the vehicle.
The curtain airbag inflates between the front or
rear occupant of the vehicle and the windows.
Impact detection zones
A. Front impact zone.
B. Side impact zone.
Operating fault
If this warning lamp comes on in
the instrument panel, accompanied
by an audible signal and a message
in the screen, contact a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop to have the
system checked. The airbags may no longer be
deployed in the event of a serious impact.
In the event of a minor impact or bump
on the side of the vehicle or if the
vehicle rolls over, the airbag may not be
deployed.
In the event of a rear or front collision,
the airbag is not deployed.
7
Safety
135
3008_en_Chap07_securite_ed01-2015
Guidelines to follow:
Sit in a normal upright position.
Wear a correctly adjusted seat belt.
Do not allow anything to come between
the occupants and the airbags (a child, pet,
object...), do not attach or fix anything near to
the airbags or their trajectories when inflating
as this could cause injuries when the airbags
are deployed.
Never modify the original definition of your
vehicle, particularly in the area directly
around the airbags.
After an accident or if the vehicle has been
stolen or broken into, have the airbag systems
checked.
All work on the airbag system must be carried
out by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Even if all of the precautions mentioned
are observed, a risk of injury or of minor
burns to the head, chest or arms when an
airbag is deployed cannot be ruled out. The
bag inflates almost instantly (within a few
milliseconds) then deflates within the same
time discharging the hot gas via openings
provided for this purpose.
Lateral airbags
Use only approved covers on the seats,
compatible with the deployment the lateral
airbags. For information on the range of seat
covers suitable for your vehicle, you can
contact a PEUGEOT dealer.
Refer to the "Accessories" section.
Do not fix or attach anything to the seat backs
(clothing...). This could cause injury to the
chest or arms if the lateral airbag is deployed.
Do not sit with the upper part of the body any
nearer to the door than necessary.
Front airbags
Do not drive holding the steering wheel by its
spokes or resting your hands on the centre
part of the wheel.
Passengers must not place their feet on the
dashboard.
Do not smoke as deployment of the airbags
can cause burns or the risk of injury from a
cigarette or pipe.
Never remove or pierce the steering wheel or
hit it violently.
Do not fit or attach anything to the steering
wheel or dashboard, this could cause injuries
with deployment of the airbags.
Curtain airbags
Do not fix or attach anything to the roof. This
could cause injury to the head if the curtain
airbag is deployed.
If fitted on your vehicle, do not remove the
grab handles installed on the roof, they play a
part in securing the curtain airbags.
136
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
Driving recommendations
Observe the driving regulations and remain
vigilant whatever the traffic conditions.
Pay close attention to the traffic and keep your
hands on the wheel so that you are ready to
react at any time to any eventuality.
On a long journey, a break every two hours is
strongly recommended.
In difficult weather, drive smoothly, anticipate
the need to brake and increase the distance
from other vehicles.
Driving on flooded roads
We strongly advise against driving on flooded
roads, as this could cause serious damage
to the engine or gearbox, as well as to the
electrical systems of your vehicle.
Important!
Never drive with the parking brake
applied - Risk of overheating and
damage to the braking system!
Do not park or run the engine when
stationary in areas where inflammable
substances and materials (dry grass,
dead leaves...) might come into contact
with the hot exhaust system - Risk of
fire!
Never leave a vehicle unsupervised
with the engine running. If you have
to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, apply the parking brake
and put the gearbox into neutral or
position N or P, depending on the type
of gearbox.
If you are obliged to drive through water:
On leaving the flooded road, as soon as
circumstances allow, make several light brake
applications to dry the brake discs and pads.
If in doubt on the state of your vehicle, contact
a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
- check that the depth of water does not
exceed 15 cm, taking account of waves
that might be generated by other users,
- deactivate the Stop & Start system,
- drive as slowly as possible without
stalling. In all cases, do not exceed 6 mph
(10 km/h),
- do not stop and do not switch off the
engine.
8
137
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
It has 3 positions:
- position 1 (Stop): insert and removing
the key,
- position 2 (Ignition on): steering column
unlocked, ignition on, Diesel preheating,
engine running,
- position 3 (Starting).
Starting-switching off the engine
Ignition on position
It allows the use of the vehicle's electric
equipment or portable devices to be charged.
Once the state of charge of the battery drops
to the reserve level, the system switches to
energy economy mode: the power supply is
cut off automatically to preserve the remaining
battery charge.
Ignition switch
Anti-theft protection
Electronic engine immobiliser
In the event of a fault, you are informed
by illumination of this warning lamp, an
audible signal and/or the display of a
message, depending on version.
In this case, your vehicle will not start;
contact a PEUGEOT dealer as soon as
possible.
Keep safely, away from your vehicle,
the label attached to the keys given to
you on acquisition of the vehicle.
The keys contain an electronic chip which has
a special code. When the ignition is switched
on, this code must be recognised for engine
starting to be authorised.
This electronic engine immobiliser locks the
engine management system a few minutes
after the ignition is switched off and prevents
starting of the engine by anyone who does not
have the key.
138
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
Wait until this warning lamp goes off in the
instrument panel then operate the starter
motor by turning the key to position 3
without pressing the accelerator pedal,
until the engine starts. Once the engine is
running, release the key.
Starting the engine
In certain cases, you may have to apply
more force to the steering (wheels on
full lock, for example).
F With a petrol engine, operate the starter
motor by turning the key to position 3
without pressing the accelerator pedal,
until the engine starts. Once the engine is
running, release the key.
F With a Diesel engine, turn the key to
position 2, ignition on, to operate the
engine pre-heating system.
If the engine does not start straight
away, switch off the ignition. Wait a
few moments before operating the
starter motor again. If the engine does
not start after several attempts, do not
keep trying: you risk damaging the
starter motor or the engine. Contact
a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
In wintry conditions, the warning lamp
can stay on for a longer period. When
the engine is hot, the warning lamp
does not come on.
With the parking brake applied and the gearbox
in neutral or position N or P:
F depress the clutch pedal fully (manual
gearbox),
or
F press the brake pedal firmly (electronic or
automatic gearbox),
F insert the key into the ignition switch; the
system recognises the code,
F unlock the steering column by simultaneously
turning the steering and the key.
In temperate conditions, do not leave
the engine at idle to warm up but move
off straight away and drive at moderate
speed.
Never leave the engine running in
an enclosed area without adequate
ventilation: internal combustion
engines emit toxic exhaust gases,
such as carbon monoxide. Danger of
intoxication and death.
In very severe wintry conditions
(temperatures below -23°C), to ensure
the correct operation and durability of
the mechanical components of your
vehicle, engine and gearbox, it is
necessary to leave the engine running
for 4 minutes before moving off.
8
139
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
Key left in the "Ignition on"
position
If the key has been left in the ignition switch
at position 2 (Ignition on), the ignition will
be switched off automatically after one hour.
To switch the ignition back on, turn the key
to position 1 (Stop), then back to position 2
(Ignition on).
Avoid attaching heavy objects to the
key, which would weigh down on its
blade in the ignition switch and could
cause a malfunction.
For more information, refer to the
"Practical information" section, under
"Energy economy mode".
Switching off the engine
Energy economy mode
After switching off the engine (position 1-Stop),
for a maximum of 30 minutes you can still use
functions such as the audio and telematic
system, the wipers, dipped beam headlamps,
courtesy lamps, ...
To facilitate unlocking of the steering
column, it is recommended that the
wheels be returned to the straight ahead
position before switching off the engine.
F Check that the parking brake is correctly
applied, particularly on sloping ground.
Never switch off the ignition before the
vehicle is at a complete stop. With the
engine off, the braking and steering
assistance systems are also cut off: risk
of loss of control of the vehicle.
When you leave the vehicle, keep the
key with you and lock the vehicle.
F Stop the vehicle.
F With the engine running at idle, turn the key
to position 1.
F Remove the key from the ignition switch.
F To lock the steering column, turn the
steering until it locks.
140
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
The electric parking brake combines
2 operating modes:
- Automatic application/release
Application is automatic when the engine
stops, release is automatic on use of the
accelerator,
- Manual application/release
The parking brake can be applied / released
manually by pulling control lever A.
Electric parking brake
Deactivating automatic
operation
Activation / deactivation of
automatic mode is done via
the vehicle configuration menu
(automatic mode is on by
default).
Deactivation is confirmed by
illumination of this indicator lamp in
the instrument panel, accompanied
by the display of a message.
If automatic mode is deactivated, the parking
brake is then applied and released manually.
Deactivation is recommended in
particularly cold conditions (ice) and
when towing (breakdown, caravan...).
Where the automatiuc operation cannot
be deactivated, refer to the "Parking the
vehicle, brake released" section.
Do not place any object (packet of
cigarettes, telephone, ...) behind the
electric brake control.
Label on the door panel
Before leaving the vehicle, check that
parking brake applied indicator lamp is
on in the instrument panel.
For certain countries of sale, automatic
application when the engine is switched off
and automatic release when you press the
accelerator can be deactivated.
8
141
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
With the vehicle stationary, to apply the parking
brake whether the engine is running or off,
pull the control lever A towards you.
- illumination of the parking brake
applied indicator lamp,
- display of the "Parking brake applied"
message.
Manual release
With the ignition on or the engine running, to
release the parking brake, press the brake
pedal or the accelerator, pull then release the
control lever A.
- the parking brake application
indicator lamp going off,
- the display of the "Parking brake released"
message.
Manual application
- illumination of the P indicator
lamp in the control lever A,
- the P indicator lamp in the
control lever A going off,
When the driver’s door is opened with
the engine running, there is an audible
signal and a message is displayed
if the parking brake has not been
applied (unless the selector lever is
in position P (Park) in the case of an
automatic gearbox).
If you pull the control lever A
without pressing the brake
pedal, the parking brake will not be released
and a warning lamp will come on in the
instrument panel.
Before leaving the vehicle, check that
parking brake indicator lamp and the P
indicator lamp in the control lever A,
are on.
Full application of the parking brake is
confirmed by:
Application of the parking brake is
confirmed by:
To immobilise the vehicle,
engine running
With the engine running and the vehicle
stationary, in order to immobilise the vehicle
it is essential to manually apply the parking
brake by pulling control lever A.
- illumination of the parking
braking indicator lamp,
The application of the parking brake is
confirmed by:
- illumination of the P indicator
lamp in the control lever A,
When the driver’s door is opened, an
audible signal heard and a message is
displayed if the parking brake has not
been applied (unless the selector lever
is in position P (Park) in the case of an
automatic gearbox).
- display of the "Parking brake applied"
message.
142
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
Automatic application,
engine off
With the vehicle stationary, the parking brake
is automatically applied when the engine is
switched off.
Maximum application is essential:
- in the case of a vehicle towing a caravan
or a trailer, if the automatic functions are
activated but you are applying the parking
brake manually,
- when the gradient you are parked on is
variable in its effect (e.g. on a ferry, in a
lorry, during towing).
- illumination of the parking brake
applied indicator lamp,
- display of the "Parking brake applied"
message.
The characteristic noise of operation confirms
the application of the electric parking brake.
The application of the parking brake is
confirmed by:
- illumination of the P indicator
lamp in the control lever A,
Before leaving the vehicle, check that
parking brake indicator lamp is on in the
instrument panel.
Never leave a child alone inside the
vehicle with the ignition on, as they
could release the parking brake.
In the case of towing, a loaded vehicle
or parking on a gradient, turn the front
wheels towards the pavement and
engage a gear when you park.
When stationary, with the engine running, do
not press the accelerator pedal unnecessarily,
as you may release the parking brake.
In the case of towing, a loaded vehicle
or parking on a gradient, make a
maximum application of the parking
brake then turn the front wheels
towards the pavement and engage a
gear when you park.
After a maximum application, the
release time will be longer.
Maximum application
If necessary, you can make a maximum
application of the parking brake. It is obtained
by means of a long pull on the control lever A,
until you see the message "Parking brake
applied" and a beep is heard.
Full release of the parking brake is
confirmed by:
- the parking brake application
indicator lamp going off,
- the display of the "Parking brake released"
message.
- the P indicator lamp in the
control lever A going off,
Automatic release
The electric parking brake releases
automatically and progressively when you
press the accelerator:
F Manual gearbox: press down fully on the
clutch pedal, engage first gear or reverse,
press on the accelerator pedal and move
off.
F Electronic gearbox: select position A, M
or R then press the accelerator pedal.
F Automatic gearbox: select position D, M
or R then press the accelerator pedal.
8
143
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
Emergency braking
In the event of a failure of the main service
brake or in an exceptional situation (e.g. driver
taken ill, under instruction, etc) a continuous
pull on the control lever A will stop the
vehicle.
The dynamic stability control (DSC) provides
stability during emergency braking.
If there is a fault with the emergency braking,
one of the following messages will be
displayed:
- "Parking brake faulty".
- "Parking brake control faulty".
If a failure of the DSC system is
signalled by the illumination of this
warning lamp, then braking stability
is not guaranteed.
Emergency braking must only be used
in exceptional circumstances.
Particular situations
Parking the vehicle, brake
released
To release the parking brake:
F Switch the ignition on without
starting the engine.
F Press the brake pedal and release
the parking brake by pulling then
releasing control lever A.
The full release of the parking brake is
confirmed by the indicator lamp in the
control lever A and the indicator lamp in
the instrument panel going off and the
display of the "Parking brake released"
message.
In this event, stability must be assured by the
driver by repeating alternate "pull release"
actions on control lever A.
144
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
Hill start assist
Operation
On an ascending slope, with the vehicle
stationary, the vehicle is held for a momentarily
when you release the brake pedal:
- provided you are in first gear or neutral on
a manual gearbox,
- provided you are in position A or M on an
electronic gearbox,
- provided you are in position D or M on an
automatic gearbox.
On a descending slope, with the vehicle
stationary and reverse gear engaged, the
vehicle is held momentarily when you
release the brake pedal.
Operating fault
If a fault in the system occurs, these warning
lamps come on. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer
or a qualified workshop to have the system
checked.
System which keeps your vehicle immobilised
temporarily (approximately 2 seconds) when
starting on a gradient, the time it takes to
move your foot from the brake pedal to the
accelerator pedal.
This system only operates when:
- the vehicle is completely stationary, with
your foot on the brake pedal,
- in particular conditions on a slope,
- with the driver’s door closed.
The hill start assist system cannot be
deactivated.
Do not exit the vehicle while it is being
held in the hill start assist phase.
If you need to exit the vehicle with the
engine running, apply the parking brake
manually then ensure that the parking
brake warning lamp (and the warning
lamp P in the lever of the electric
parking brake) are on fixed
(not flashing).
8
145
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
Operating faults
If the electric parking brake fault warning lamp comes on together with one or more of the warning lamps presented in these tables, place the vehicle in
a safe condition (on level ground, gear engaged) and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop without delay.
Situations Consequences
Display of the message "Parking brake fault"
and of the following warning lamps:
- The automatic functions are deactivated.
- Hill start assist is not available.
- The electric parking brake can only be used manually.
Display of the message "Parking brake fault"
and of the following warning lamps:
- Manual release of the electric parking brake is only available by pressing the accelerator pedal
and releasing the control.
- Hill start assist is not available.
- The automatic functions and the manual application are still available.
Display of the message "Parking brake fault"
and of the following warning lamps:
- The automatic functions are deactivated.
- Hill start assist is not available.
To apply the electric parking brake:
F Immobilise the vehicle and switch off the ignition.
F Pull the control for at least 5 seconds or until application is complete.
F Switch on the ignition and check the switching on of the electric parking brake
warning lamps.
The application is slower than during normal operation.
To release the electric parking brake:
F Switch on the ignition.
F Pull the control and hold it for approximately 3 seconds then release it.
If the braking warning lamp is flashing or if the warning lamps do not come on with the ignition
on, these procedures will not work. Place the vehicle on level ground and have it checked by a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
and possibly
flashing
146
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
Situations Consequences
Display of the message "Parking brake
control fault - auto parking brake activated"
and of the following warning lamps:
- Only the automatic application on switching off the engine and automatic release on
acceleration functions are available.
- The manual application/release of the electric parking brake and the emergency braking are
not available.
and possibly
flashing
Battery fault - If the battery warning lamp comes on you must stop immediately, as soon as the traffic allows.
Stop and immobilise your vehicle (if necessary, depending on version, place the a chock
against one of the wheels).
- Apply the electric parking brake before switching off the engine.
8
147
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
System which projects various information onto
a transparent blade in the driver's field of vision
so that they do not have to take their eyes off
the road.
This system operates when the engine is
running and the settings are stored when the
ignition is switched off.
Head-up display
1. Head-up display on / off.
2. Brightness adjustment.
3. Display height adjustment.
Once the system has been activated, the
following information is grouped together in the
head-up display:
A. The speed of your vehicle.
B. Cruise control/speed limiter information.
Buttons Displays during operation
C. "Distance alert" information (depending on
version).
The blade is activated by pressing one
of the buttons.
D. Navigation information (depending on
version).
For more information on the navigation
system, refer to the "Audio equipment and
telematics" section.
148
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
F With the engine running, press button 1.
The activated/deactivated status when the
engine was switched off is retained when
the engine is switched on again.
F With the engine running, adjust the
brightness of the information using
button 2:
- up to increase the brightness,
- down to decrease the brightness.
Activation / Deactivation Brightness adjustment
Height adjustment
F With the engine running, adjust the display
to the required height using button 3:
- up to move the display up,
- down to move the display down.
We recommend that adjustments are
only made using these buttons when
the vehicle is stationary.
When stationary or while driving, no
objects should be placed around the
transparent blade (or on its cover) to
avoid interfering with the movement
of the blade and preventing its correct
operation.
In certain extreme weather conditions
(rain and/or snow, bright sunshine, ...)
the head-up display may not be legible
or may suffer temporary interference.
Certain glasses (sunglasses,
spectacles or polarised lenses) may
hamper reading of the information.
To clean the transparent blade, which
is made of organic glass, use a clean,
soft cloth (such as a spectacles cloth
or microfibre cloth). Do not use a dry or
abrasive cloth or detergent or solvent
products as these could scratch the
blade or damage the anti-reflection
coating.
8
149
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
Distance alert*
For the safety time to be observed, refer
to the current legislation or highway code
recommendations in your country.
The system operates when the speed of your
vehicle is higher than 45 mph (70 km/h) and
below 90 mph (150 km/h).
It has a programmable visual alert which
remains in the memory when the ignition is
switched off.
This system is a driving aid and cannot, in any
circumstances, take the place of vigilance on
the part of the driver.
1. On / off.
2. Alert value increase (+) / decrease (-).
The information is grouped together in the
head-up display.
Once the system has been activated:
A. The speed of your vehicle is outside the
operating range.
B. Your vehicle is within the operating range
but no vehicle has been detected.
C. The vehicle in front of you has been
detected.
The current time separating you from this
vehicle is displayed permanently.
D. The time between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front is less than the
programmed alert value (it flashes).
Buttons Displays during operation
Driving aid which informs the driver of the time
interval (in seconds) separating them from the
vehicle in front when the driving conditions are
stable.
It does not detect stationary vehicles and does
not itself take any action on your vehicle's
controls.
* Depending on version.
150
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
Activation
Example with a value of 2 seconds:
AlertProgramming the alert
value
F Press button 1, the indicator lamp
comes on.
The system is activated but will only operate
from 45 mph (70 km/h).
The alert value can be programmed to
between 0.9 second and 2.5 seconds.
The visual alert can be deactivated by
programming a value of 0 second.
When the time (in seconds) between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front is less than the
programmed time (alert value), a visual alert
flashes.
A safety time of 2 seconds is
recommended in normal driving
conditions (correct traction and speed)
to avoid a collision in the event of
emergency braking.
F Select the alert value required using
button 2, in steps of 0.1 second:
- up to increase: "+",
- down to decrease: "-".
8
151
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
Deactivation
Reactivation
F Press button 1 again to reactivate the
system.
The last value programmed is retained and
the indicator lamp comes on.
Operating limits
If the indicator lamp in button 1
flashes, have the system checked
by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
This system is not an anti-collision radar
and it does not act of the movement
of your vehicle. It provides information
but cannot, in any circumstances, take
the place of vigilance on the part of
the driver.
F Press button 1 to deactivate the system,
the indicator lamp goes off.
The system switches to standby automatically
if the sensor does not detect the vehicle in front
correctly (very difficult weather conditions,
sensor out of adjustment, ...). A message is
displayed in the multifunction screen.
The vehicle being followed may not be detected
in certain conditions such as, for example:
- when turning,
- when changing lane,
- when the vehicle in front is either too far
ahead (maximum range of the sensor:
100 m) or stationary (in a traffic jam, ...),
When the vehicle being followed is much
too near (time between the two vehicles less
than 0.5 seconds), the display remains fixed
at 0.5 seconds.
152
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
Speed limiter
The controls of this system are grouped
together on stalk A.
1. Speed limiter mode selection dial
2. Programmed value decrease button
3. Programmed value increase button
4. Speed limiter on / off button
The programmed information is grouped
together on the instrument panel screen.
5. Speed limiter on / off indication
6. Speed limiter mode selection indication
7. Programmed speed value
Steering mounted controls
Displays in the instrument panel
The speed limiter is switched on manually:
it requires a programmed speed of at least
20 mph (30 km/h).
The speed limiter is switched off by manual
operation of the control.
The programmed speed remains in the memory
when the ignition is switched off.
System which prevents the vehicle from
exceeding the speed programmed by the
driver.
When the programmed speed limit is reached,
pressing the accelerator pedal no longer
has any effect unless it is pressed firmly,
which permits temporary exceeding of the
programmed speed.
To return to the programmed speed, simply
slow down to a speed below the programmed
speed by releasing the accelerator.
The speed limiter cannot, in any
circumstances, replace the need to observe
speed limits, nor can it replace the need for
vigilance on the part of the driver.
This information also appears in the
head-up display.
For more information, refer to the
"Head-up display" section.
8
153
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
Programming
F Switch the speed limiter off by pressing
button 4: the display confirms that it has
been switched off (OFF/Pause).
F Switch the speed limiter back on by
pressing button 4 again.
F Set the speed value by pressing button 2
or 3 (e.g.: 55 mph (90 km/h)).
You can then change the programmed speed
using buttons 2 and 3:
- by + or - 1 mph (km/h) = short press,
- by + or - 5 mph (km/h) = long press,
- in steps of + or - 5 mph (km/h) = maintained
press.
F Switch the speed limiter on by pressing
button 4.
F Turn dial 1 to the "LIMIT" position: the
speed limiter mode is selected but is not
switched on (OFF/Pause).
You do not have to switch the speed limiter on
in order to set the speed.
154
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
Operating fault
On a steep descent or in the event of
sharp acceleration, the speed limiter
will not be able to prevent the vehicle
from exceeding the programmed speed.
To avoid any risk of jamming of the
pedals:
- ensure that the mat is positioned
correctly,
- do not fit one mat on top of another.
Return to normal
driving
Exceeding the programmed
speed
Pressing the accelerator pedal to exceed the
programmed speed will not have any effect
unless you press the pedal firmly past the
point of resistance.
The speed limiter is deactivated temporarily
and the programmed speed, which is still
displayed, flashes.
Returning to the programmed speed, by means
of intentional or unintentional deceleration of
the vehicle, automatically cancels the flashing
of the programmed speed.
In the event of a speed limiter malfunction, the
speed is cleared resulting in flashing of the
dashes.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
F Turn dial 1 to the "0" position: the speed
limiter mode is deselected. The display
returns to the distance recorder.
8
155
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
Cruise control
The controls of this system are grouped
together on stalk A.
1. Cruise control mode selection dial
2. Speed programming / programmed value
decrease button
3. Speed programming / programmed value
increase button
4. Cruise control off / resume button
The programmed information is grouped
together in the instrument panel screen.
5. Cruise control off / resume indication
6. Cruise control mode selection indication
7. Programmed speed value
Steering mounted controls
Displays in the instrument panel
The cruise control is switched on manually: it
requires a minimum vehicle speed of 25 mph
(40 km/h) and the engagement of:
- fourth gear on the manual gearbox,
- second gear in sequential mode on an
electronic or automatic gearbox,
- position A on an electronic gearbox or D
on an automatic gearbox.
The cruise control is switched off manually
or by pressing the brake or clutch pedal or on
triggering of the DSC/ASR systems for safety
reasons.
It is possible to exceed the programmed speed
temporarily by pressing the accelerator pedal.
To return to the programmed speed, simply
release the accelerator pedal.
System which automatically maintains the
speed of the vehicle at the value programmed
by the driver, without any action on the
accelerator pedal.
Switching off the ignition cancels any
programmed speed value.
The cruise control cannot, in any
circumstances, replace the need to observe
speed limits, nor can it replace the need for
vigilance on the part of the driver.
This information also appears in the
head-up display.
For more information, refer to the
"Head-up display" section.
156
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
Programming
F Set the programmed speed by accelerating
to the required speed, then press button 2
or 3 (e.g.: 70 mph (110 km/h)).
You can then change the programmed speed
using buttons 2 and 3:
- by + or - 1 mph (km/h) = short press,
- by + or - 5 mph (km/h) = long press,
- in steps of + or - 5 mph (km/h) = maintained
press.
F Switch off the cruise control by pressing
button 4: the display confirms that it has
been switched off (OFF/Pause).
F Switch the cruise control back on by
pressing button 4 again.
F Turn dial 1 to the "CRUISE" position: the
cruise control mode is selected but is not
switched on (OFF/Pause).
8
157
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
Exceeding the programmed
speed
Return to normal driving
Operating fault
When the cruise control is switched on,
be careful if you maintain the pressure
on one of the programmed speed
changing buttons: this may result in
a very rapid change in the speed of
your vehicle.
Do not use the cruise control on
slippery roads or in heavy traffic.
On a steep descent, the cruise control
will not be able to prevent the vehicle
from exceeding the programmed speed.
To avoid any risk of jamming of the
pedals:
- ensure that the mat is positioned
correctly,
- never fit one mat on top of another.
Intentional or unintentional exceeding of the
programmed speed results in flashing of this
speed in the screen.
Return to the programmed speed, by means of
intentional or unintentional deceleration of the
vehicle, automatically cancels the flashing of
the speed.
In the event of a cruise control malfunction,
the speed is cleared resulting in flashing of the
dashes.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
F Turn dial 1 to the "0" position: the cruise
control mode is deselected. The display
returns to the distance recorder.
158
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
6-speed manual gearbox
Engaging 5
th
or 6
th
gear Engaging reverse gear
Only engage reverse gear when the
vehicle is stationary with the engine at idle.
As a safety precaution and to facilitate
starting of the engine:
- always select neutral,
- press the clutch pedal.
F Raise the ring under the knob and move
the gear lever to the left then forwards.
F Move the lever fully to the right to
engage 5
th
or 6
th
gear.
Failure to observe this procedure may
cause permanent damage to the gearbox
(engaging 3
rd
or 4
th
gear by mistake).
8
159
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
Electronic gearbox
Gear lever
R. Reverse
F With your foot on the brake, move the lever
upwards to select this position.
N. Neutral.
F With your foot on the brake, select this
position to start.
A. Automatic mode.
F Move the lever downwards to select
this mode.
Six-speed electronic gearbox which offers a
choice between the comfort of fully automatic
operation or the pleasure of manual gear
changing.
Three driving modes are offered:
- automatic mode for automatic control of
the gears by the gearbox,
- manual mode for sequential changing of
the gears by the driver,
- auto sequential mode to overtake, for
example, remaining in automatic mode
while using the functions of the sequential
mode.
A Sport function is available in automatic or
sequential mode for a more dynamic style of
driving.
M. + / - Manual mode with manual
sequential changing of the gears.
F Move the lever downwards then to the left
to select this mode, then:
- push the lever forwards to change up
a gear,
- or pull the lever rearwards to change
down a gear.
S. Sport setting.
F Press this button to activate or deactivate
this function.
160
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
Steering mounted controls
+. Change up paddle to the right of the
steering wheel.
F Press the back of the "+" steering mounted
paddle to change up a gear.
-. Change down paddle to the left of the
steering wheel.
F Press the back of the "-" steering mounted
paddle to change down a gear.
The steering mounted paddles cannot
be used to select neutral or engage or
disengage reverse gear.
Displays in the instrument panel
Gear lever positions
When you move the lever, the symbol
corresponding to its position is displayed in the
instrument panel.
N. Neutral
R. Reverse
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6. Gears in sequential mode
AUTO. This comes on when the automatic
mode is selected. It goes off on
changing to sequential mode.
S. Sport (Sport setting)
F Place your foot on the brake
when this warning lamp flashes
(e.g.: when starting the engine).
There is an audible signal when reverse
gear is engaged.
Moving off
F Select position N.
F Press the brake pedal down fully.
F Start the engine.
F Keep your foot on the brake pedal, move
the gear lever to position A or M to go
forwards, or R to go backwards.
F Take your foot off the brake pedal, you can
then move off.
F The parking brake is released
automatically, otherwise release it
manually.
If the engine does not start:
- If N is flashing in the instrument
panel, move the lever to position A
then to position N.
- If the message "Foot on brake" is
displayed, press the brake pedal
firmly.
8
161
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
AUTO and 1 or R appear in the
instrument panel screen.
Manual mode
AUTO disappears and the gears engaged
appear in succession in the instrument panel
screen.
The gear change requests are only
carried out if the engine speed
permits.
It is not necessary to release the
accelerator during gear changes.
When braking or slowing down, the gearbox
changes down automatically to allow vehicle to
pull away in the correct gear.
F When the vehicle has moved off, select
position M to change to manual mode for
sequential gear changing.
If position R, A or M is selected, even
with the engine at idle, if the brakes are
released the vehicle moves without any
action on the accelerator. Never leave
children unsupervised in the vehicle
when the engine is running. When
carrying out maintenance on the vehicle
with the engine running, apply the
parking brake and select position N.
On sharp acceleration, the gearbox will
not change up unless the driver acts on
the gear lever or the steering mounted
paddles.
Never select neutral N while the vehicle
is moving.
Only engage reverse gear R when the
vehicle is immobilised with the brake
pedal pressed.
At very low speed, if reverse gear is
requested, this will only be taken into
account when the vehicle is immobilised.
The Foot on brake warning lamp may
flash in the instrument panel to prompt you
to brake.
At high speed, if reverse gear is
requested, the N indicator lamp will flash
and the gearbox will change to neutral
automatically. To engage a gear again,
return the lever to position A or M.
162
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
The gearbox is then operating in auto-active
mode, without any action on the part of the
driver. It continuously selects the most suitable
gear in relation to the following parameters:
- style of driving,
- profile of the road.
AUTO and the gear engaged
appear in the instrument panel
screen.
Automatic mode Auto sequential mode
F Following use of manual mode, select
position A to return to automatic mode.
For optimum acceleration, for example
when overtaking another vehicle, press
the accelerator pedal firmly past the
point of resistance.
Sport setting
F Following selection of the sequential mode
or automatic mode, press button S to
activate the Sport setting which offers you
a more dynamic style of driving.
S appears next to the gear engaged
in the instrument panel screen.
F Press button S again to return to normal
settings.
S is then cleared from the instrument panel
screen.
The gearbox returns to normal mode
automatically each time the ignition is
switched off.
This mode enables you to overtake, for
example, remaining in automatic mode while
using the functions of manual mode.
F Operate the + or - steering mounted
paddle.
The gearbox engages the gear requested if the
engine speed permits. AUTO is still displayed
in the instrument panel.
After a few moments without any action on
the controls, the gearbox resumes automatic
control of the gears.
8
163
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
Stopping the vehicle Operating fault
With the ignition on, if this warning
lamp comes on and AUTO flashes,
accompanied by an audible signal
and a message in the screen, this
indicates a fault with the gearbox.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Before switching off the engine, you can
choose to:
- move to position N to engage neutral,
- leave the gear engaged; in this case, it will
not be possible to move the vehicle.
In both cases, it is essential that you apply the
parking brake to immobilise the vehicle, unless
it is programmed in automatic mode.
When immobilising the vehicle, with the
engine running, it is essential to place
the gear lever in neutral N.
Before carrying out any work in the
engine compartment, check that the
gear lever is in neutral N and that the
parking brake is applied.
It is essential to press the brake pedal
when starting the engine.
When parking, is it essential to apply
the parking brake to immobilise the
vehicle, whatever the circumstances.
When driving on flooded roads or when
crossing a ford, drive at walking speed.
164
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
"Porsche Tiptronic System" automatic gearbox
Gear lever
P. Park.
- Immobilisation of the vehicle, parking brake
on or off.
- Starting the engine.
R. Reverse.
- Reversing manoeuvres, vehicle stationary,
engine at idle.
N. Neutral.
- Immobilisation of the vehicle, parking brake
on.
- Starting the engine.
D. Automatic operation.
M + / -. Manual operation with sequential
changing of the six gears.
F Press forwards to change up through the
gears.
or
F Press rearwards to change down through
the gears.
Displays in the instrument panel
When you move the lever in the gate to select
a position, the corresponding indicator is
displayed in the instrument panel.
P. Park
R. Reverse
N. Neutral
D. Drive (Automatic driving)
S. Sport programme
T. Snow programme
1 to 6. Gear engaged during manual operation
-. Invalid value during manual operation
Gear selection gate
1. Gear lever.
2. Button "S" (sport).
3. Button "T" (snow).
Six speed automatic gearbox which offers a
choice between the comfort of fully automatic
operation, enhanced by sport and snow
programmes, or manual gear changing.
Four driving modes are offered:
- automatic operation for electronic
management of the gears by the gearbox,
- sport programme for a more dynamic style
of driving,
- snow programme to improve driving when
traction is poor,
- manual operation for sequential changing
of the gears by the driver.
8
165
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
Moving off
F With your foot on the brake, select
position P or N.
F Start the engine.
If this procedure is not followed, there is an
audible signal, accompanied by a message in
the multifunction screen.
F With the engine running, press the brake
pedal.
F Release the parking brake, unless it is
programmed to automatic mode.
F Select position R, D or M.
F Gradually release the brake pedal.
The vehicle moves off immediately.
Automatic operation
F Select position D for automatic changing
of the six gears.
The gearbox then operates in auto-adaptive
mode, without any intervention on the part
of the driver. It continuously selects the
most suitable gear according to the style of
driving, the profile of the road and the load in
the vehicle.
For maximum acceleration without touching
the lever, press the accelerator pedal down
fully (kick down). The gearbox changes down
automatically or maintains the gear selected
until the maximum engine speed is reached.
On braking, the gearbox changes down
automatically to provide efficient engine
braking.
If you release the accelerator sharply, the
gearbox will not change to a higher gear for
safety reasons.
When the engine is running at idle, with
the brakes released, if position R, D or
M is selected, the vehicle moves even
without the accelerator being pressed.
When the engine is running, never
leave children in the vehicle without
supervision.
When carrying out maintenance with
the engine running, apply the parking
brake and select position P.
If position N is engaged inadvertently
while driving, allow the engine to
return to idle then engage position D to
accelerate.
Never select position N while the
vehicle is moving.
Never select positions P or R unless the
vehicle is completely stationary.
A message is displayed if you try to
move the gear lever from position P to
another position without pressing the
brake pedal.
166
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
T appears in the instrument panel.
Snow programme "T"
F Press button "T", after starting the engine.
The gearbox adapts to driving on slippery
roads.
This programme improves the vehicle's ability
to move off and traction when grip is poor.
S appears in the instrument panel.
Sport programme "S"
F Press button "S", after starting the engine.
The gearbox automatically favours a dynamic
style of driving.
Sport and snow programmes
These two special programmes supplement the
automatic operation in very specific conditions
of use.
Return to automatic
operation
F At any time, press the button selected
again to quit the programme engaged and
return to auto-adaptive mode.
Manual operation
F Select position M for sequential changing
of the six gears.
F Push the lever towards the + sign to
change up a gear.
F Pull the lever towards the - sign to change
down a gear.
D disappears and the gears
engaged appear in succession in
the instrument panel.
It is only possible to change from one gear to
another if the vehicle speed and engine speed
permit; otherwise, the gearbox will operate
temporarily in automatic mode.
It is possible to change from position D
(automatic) to position M (manual) at any time.
When the vehicle is stationary or moving
very slowly, the gearbox selects gear M1
automatically.
The sport and snow programmes do not
operate in manual mode.
If the engine speed is too low or too high, the
gear selected flashes for a few seconds, then
the actual gear engaged is displayed.
8
167
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
Stopping the vehicle
Before switching off the engine, you can
engage position P or N to place the gearbox in
neutral.
In both cases, apply the parking brake to
immobilise the vehicle, unless it is programmed
to automatic mode.
Operating fault
When the ignition is on, the lighting
of this warning lamp, accompanied
by an audible signal and a message
in the multifunction screen,
indicates a gearbox malfunction.
In this case, the gearbox switches to back-up
mode and is locked in 3rd gear. You may feel
a substantial knock when changing from P
to R and from N to R. This will not cause any
damage to the gearbox.
Do not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h), local speed
restrictions permitting.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
This warning lamp may also come on if a door
is opened.
Invalid value during manual
operation
This symbol is displayed if a gear
is not engaged correctly (selector
between two positions).
You risk damaging the gearbox:
- if you press the accelerator and
brake pedals at the same time,
- if you force the lever from position P
to another position when the
battery is flat.
To reduce fuel consumption when
stationary for long periods with the
engine running (traffic jam...), position
the gear lever at N and apply the
parking brake, unless it is programmed
in automatic mode.
If the lever is not in position P, when the
driver's door is opened or approximately
45 seconds after the ignition is switched
off, there is an audible signal and a
message appears.
F Return the lever to position P;
the audible signal stops and the
message disappears.
168
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
Gear shift indicator*
* Depending on engine.
The system adapts its gear change
recommendation according to the
driving conditions (slope, load, ...) and
the demands of the driver (power,
acceleration, braking, ...).
The system never suggests:
- engaging first gear,
- engaging reverse gear.
System which reduces fuel consumption by
recommending the most appropriate gear.
Operation
Depending on the driving situation and your
vehicle's equipment, the system may advise
you to skip one (or more) gear(s). You can
follow this instruction without engaging the
intermediate gears.
The gear engagement recommendations must
not be considered compulsory. In fact, the
configuration of the road, the amount of traffic
and safety remain determining factors when
choosing the best gear. Therefore, the driver
remains responsible for deciding whether or not
to follow the advice given by the system.
This function cannot be deactivated.
Example:
- You are in third gear.
- You press the accelerator pedal.
- The system may suggest that you engage
a higher gear.
The information appears in the instrument
panel in the form of an arrow.
On vehicle fitted with a manual gearbox,
the arrow may be accompanied by the gear
recommended.
With an electronic or automatic
gearbox, the system is only active in
manual mode.
On BlueHDi Diesel 136 and 150 versions with
manual gearbox, the system may suggest
changing into neutral so that the engine can go
into standby (STOP mode with Stop & Start),
in certain driving conditions. In this case, N is
displayed in the instrument panel.
8
169
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
The Stop & Start system puts the engine
temporarily into standby - STOP mode - during
stops in the traffic (red lights, traffic jams, or
other...). The engine restarts automatically -
START mode - as soon as you want to move
off. The restart takes place instantly, quickly
and silently.
Perfect for urban use, the Stop & Start system
reduces fuel consumption and exhaust
emissions as well as the noise level when
stationary.
Operation
Going into engine STOP mode
The "ECO" indicator lamp comes
on in the instrument panel and the
engine goes into standby:
- with a manual gearbox, at speeds below
12 mph (20 km/h), or vehicle stationary
with PureTech 130 and BlueHDi 115 and
120 versions, when you put the gear lever
into neutral and release the clutch pedal,
- with an electronic gearbox, at speeds
below 5 mph (8 km/h), when you press the
brake pedal or you put the gear selector in
position N,
Special cases: STOP mode not
available
STOP mode is not invoked when:
- the driver's door is open,
- the driver's seat belt is not fastened,
- the vehicle has not exceeded 6 mph
(10 km/h) since the last engine start using
the key,
- the vehicle is stopped on a steep slope
(up or down),
- the electric parking brake is applied or
being applied,
- the engine is needed to maintain a
comfortable temperature in the passenger
compartment,
- demisting is active,
- some special conditions (battery charge,
engine temperature, braking assistance,
ambient temperature...) where the engine is
needed to assure control of a system.
In this case, the "ECO" indicator
lamp flashes for a few seconds then
goes off.
This operation is perfectly normal.
Never refuel with the engine in STOP
mode; you must switch off the ignition
with the key.
For your comfort, during parking
maoeuvres, STOP mode is not
available for a few seconds after
coming out of reverse gear.
STOP mode does not affect the
functionality of the vehicle, such as for
example, braking, power steering...
Stop & Start
- with an automatic gearbox, vehicle
stationary, when you press the brake pedal
or you put the gear selector in position N.
If your vehicle is fitted with the system,
a time counter calculates the sum of the
periods in STOP mode during a journey.
It rests itself to zero every time the
ignition is switched on with the key.
170
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
Going into engine START mode
The "ECO" indicator lamp goes off
and the engine starts automatically:
- with a manual gearbox, when you fully
depress the clutch pedal,
- with an electronic gearbox:
● gear selector in position A or M, when
you release the brake pedal,
● or gear selector in position N and brake
pedal released, when you put the gear
selector in position A or M,
● or when you engage reverse gear.
- with an automatic gearbox:
● gear selector in position D or M, when
you release the brake pedal,
● or gear selector in position N and brake
pedal released, when you put the gear
selector in position D or M,
● or when you engage reverse gear.
In this case the "ECO" indicator lamp
flashes for a few seconds, then goes
off.
Special cases: START invoked
automatically
START mode is invoked automatically when:
- the driver's door is open,
- the driver's seat belt is not fastened,
- the speed of the vehicle exceeds 18 mph
(25 km/h) with a manual gearbox, 2 mph
(3 km/h) with the PureTech 130 and
BlueHDi 115 and 120 versions, 7 mph
(11 km/h) with an electronic gearbox or
2 mph (3 km/h) with an automatic gearbox,
- the electric parking brake is being applied,
- some special conditions (battery charge,
engine temperature, braking assistance,
ambient temperature...) where the engine is
needed for control of a system.
This operation is perfectly normal.
Deactivation
At any time, press the "ECO OFF" switch to
deactivate the system.
This is confirmed by the indicator lamp in the
switch coming on accompanied by a message
in the screen.
If the system has been deactivated
in STOP mode, the engine restarts
immediately.
8
171
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
Reactivation
Press the "ECO OFF" switch again.
The system is active again; this is confirmed by
the indicator lamp in the switch going off and a
message in the screen.
Operating fault
In the event of a fault with the system, the
indicator lamp in the "ECO OFF" switch
flashes then comes on continuously.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
In the event of a fault in STOP mode, the
vehicle may stall: all the instrument panel
warning lamps come on. It is then necessary
to switch off the ignition and start the engine
again using the key.
Maintenance
This system requires a 12 V battery with a
special specification and technology (reference
numbers available from PEUGEOT dealers).
Fitting a battery not listed by PEUGEOT
introduces the risk of malfunction of the
system.
To charge the battery, use a 12 V charger and
observe the polarity.
The system is reactivated automatically
at every new start using the key.
The Stop & Start system makes use of
advanced technology. For any work on
the system go to a qualified workshop with
the skills and equipment required, which a
PEUGEOT dealer is able to provide.
Before doing anything under the
bonnet, deactivate the Stop & Start
system to avoid any risk of injury
resulting from automatic operation of
START mode.
When driving on flooded roads or
crossing a ford, switch off the Stop &
Start and drive at walking speed.
172
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
Tyre under-ination detection
System which automatically checks the
pressures of the tyres while driving.
The system continuously monitors the
pressures of the four tyres, as soon as the
vehicle is moving.
A pressure sensor is located in the valve of
each tyre (except the spare wheel).
The system triggers an alert if a drop in
pressure is detected in one or more tyres.
This system does not avoid the need
to check the tyre pressures regularly
(including the spare wheel) and before
a long journey.
Driving with under-inflated tyres
adversely affects road holding,
extends braking distances and causes
premature tyre wear, particularly under
arduous conditions (vehicle loaded,
high speed, long journey).
The tyre pressures for your vehicle can
be found on the tyre pressure label (see
the "Identification markings" section).
The tyre pressures must be checked
when the tyres cold (vehicle stopped
for 1 hour or after driving for less
then 6 miles (10 km) at moderate
speed). Otherwise, add 0.3 bar to the
values indicated on the label.
Driving with under-inflated tyres
increases fuel consumption.
The tyre under-inflation detection
system is an aid to driving which does
not replace the need for vigilance on
the part of the driver.
8
173
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
The flashing and then fixed
illumination of the under-inflation
warning lamp accompanied by
the illumination of the service warning lamp
indicates a fault with the system.
In this case, monitoring of the tyre pressures is
not assured.
This alert is also displayed when one or
more wheels is not fitted with a sensor
(for example, a space-saver or steel
spare wheel).
Under-inflation alert
The alert is given by the fixed illumination
of this warning lamp, accompanied by
an audible signal, and depending on
equipment, the display of a message.
In the event of a problem on one of the tyres,
the symbol or the message appears, according
to equipment, to identify it.
F Reduce speed, avoid sudden steering
movements or harsh brake applications.
F Stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
The loss of pressure detected does not
always lead to visible deformation of the
tyre. Do not rely on just a visual check.
The alert is maintained until the tyre or
tyres concerned is reinflated, repaired
or replaced.
The spare wheel (space-saver type or a
steel rim) does not have a sensor.
Operating fault
Go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop to have the system checked
or, following the repair of a puncture, to
have the original wheel, equipped with a
sensor, refitted.
F If you have a compressor (the one in the
temporary puncture repair kit for example),
check the four tyre pressures when cold.
If it is not possible to check the tyre
pressures at the time, drive carefully at
reduced speed.
or
F In the event of a puncture, use the
temporary puncture repair kit or the spare
wheel (according to equipment).
Any tyre repair or replacement on a
wheel fitted with this system must be
carried out by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
If after changing a tyre, a wheel is not
detected by your vehicle (fitting snow
tyres for example), you must have the
system reinitialised by a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
174
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
Visual and audible front and rear parking sensors
System consisting of four proximity sensors,
installed in the front and/or rear bumper.
It detects any obstacle (person, vehicle, tree,
barrier...) located behind the vehicle, however,
it will not be able to detect obstacles located
immediately below the bumper.
The parking sensors are switched on:
- by engaging reverse gear,
- at a speed below 6 mph (10 km/h) in
forward gear.
This is accompanied by an audible signal
and display of the vehicle in the multifunction
screen.
The proximity information is indicated by:
- an audible signal which becomes more
rapid as the vehicle approaches the
obstacle,
- a graphic in the multifunction screen, with
blocks which move closer to the vehicle.
The obstacle is located in relation to the
emission of the audible signal by the speakers;
front or rear and right or left.
When the distance between the vehicle
and the obstacle is less than approximately
thirty centimetres, the audible signal becomes
continuous and/or the "Danger" symbol
appears, depending on the multifunction
screen version.
An object, such as a stake, a roadworks
cone or any other similar object may be
detected at the start of the manoeuvre
but may no longer be detected when the
vehicle moves nearer to it.
8
175
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
The parking sensors are switched off:
- when you come out of reverse gear,
- when the speed is higher than 6 mph
(10 km/h) in forward gear,
- when the vehicle has been stationary for
more than three seconds in forward gear.
Deactivation
Operating fault
F Press button A again, the warning lamp
switches off, the system is reactivated.
F Press button A, the warning lamp comes
on, the system is fully deactivated.
If an operating fault occurs, this
warning lamp is displayed in the
instrument panel and/or a message
appears in the multifunction screen,
accompanied by an audible signal (short beep),
when reverse gear is engaged.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
The parking sensor system cannot, in
any circumstances, replace the need for
vigilance on the part of the driver.
The system will be deactivated
automatically when a trailer is being
towed or when a bicycle carrier is fitted
(vehicle fitted with a towbar or bicycle
carrier recommended by PEUGEOT).
In bad weather or in winter, ensure
that the sensors are not covered with
mud, ice or snow. When reverse gear is
engaged, an audible signal (long beep)
indicates that the sensors may be dirty.
When the vehicle is being driven at
a speed below approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h), certain sources of noise
(motorcycles, lorries, pneumatic
drills, ...) may trigger the parking sensor
audible signals.
Reactivation
176
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
Reversing camera
The reversing camera is activated automatically
when reverse gear is engaged.
The colour image is provided in the navigation
screen.
This system is a driving aid that does
not replace vigilance on the part of the
driver, who must remain in control of the
vehicle at all times.
The green lines represent the general direction
of the vehicle.
Clean the lens of the reversing camera
regularly using a sponge and a soft
cloth.
When cleaning the vehicle with a high
pressure jet wash, keep the end of the
lance at least 30 cm from the camera
lens.
The red lines represent around 30 cm beyond
the limit of your vehicle's rear bumper.
The blue lines represent the maximum turning
circle.
The lines displayed in the screen do not
allow the position of the vehicle to be
determined relative to tall obstacles
(for example: vehicles nearby).
Some deformation of the image is
normal.
8
177
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
Parking space sensors
After measuring the parking space available
between two vehicles or obstacles, this system
gives you information on:
- the possibility of fitting into a free space,
depending on the dimensions of your
vehicle and the distances needed for
manoeuvring,
- the level of difficulty of the manoeuvre to
be performed.
The system does not measure spaces which
are clearly much smaller or larger than the size
of the vehicle.
Displays in the instrument panel
The parking space sensor function
warning lamp can have three
different states:
- off: the function is not selected,
- on fixed: the function is selected but the
conditions for measurement are not yet met
(direction indicator not operating, speed
too high) or the measurement phase has
ended,
- flashing: measurement is in progress or
the message is being displayed.
You can activate the "parking space sensor"
function by pressing button A. The fixed
illumination of the warning lamp indicates that
the function is selected.
178
Driving
3008_en_Chap08_conduite_ed01-2015
Operation
You have identified a parking space:
F Press button A to activate the function.
F Activate the direction indicator on the side
where the space is to be measured.
F During the measuring, go forward the
length of the space, at a speed less than
12 mph (approximately 20 km/h), to
prepare for your manoeuvre.
The system then measures the size of the
space.
F The system informs you of the level of
difficulty of the manoeuvre via a message
in the multifunction screen accompanied
by an audible signal.
The function displays the following types of message:
Parking possible
Parking difficult
Parking not advised
The function deactivates itself automatically:
- when you engage reverse gear,
- when you switch off the ignition,
- five minutes after activation of the function
or after the last measurement operation,
- if the vehicle speed exceeds the threshold
of 45 mph (approximately 70 km/h) for
one minute.
If the lateral distance between your
vehicle and the parking space is too
great, the system may not operate.
- The function remains available
after each measurement and so
can measure a number of places
successively.
- In bad weather or in winter, ensure
that the sensors are not covered by
dirt, or by ice or snow.
- The parking space sensor
function deactivates the front
parking sensors during the space
measuring phase when you are in
forward gear.
If there is a malfunction, have the
system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer
or a qualified workshop.
9
Checks
179
3008_en_Chap09_verifications_ed01-2015
PEUGEOT & TOTAL,
A PARTNERSHIP TO DELIVER
BETTER PERFORMANCE!
Innovation, the key to success
The TOTAL Research and Development and
PEUGEOT teams work together to develop high
quality lubricants that meet the requirements
of PEUGEOT vehicles. For you, this is the
assurance that the performance of your engine
is optimised while also ensuring its durability.
The 208 HYbrid FE demonstrates the ability of
PEUGEOT and TOTAL to develop innovative
technologies and provide other ways of moving
towards the future.
208 HYbrid FE, a technology demonstrator with exceptional characteristics:
1.9 l/100 km (148.7 mpg) and 0 to 100 km/h (0 to 62 mph) in 8 seconds.
Reduced exhaust emissions,
a true reality
TOTAL lubricants are formulated to optimise the
efficiency of engines and the protection of the
emissions post-treatment systems. It is important
to observe the servicing recommendations
made by PEUGEOT to assure correct operation.
RECOMMENDS
Checks
180
3008_en_Chap09_verifications_ed01-2015
Fuel tank
Low fuel level Refuelling
A label affixed to the inside of the filler flap
reminds you of the type of fuel to be used
according to your engine.
More than 5 litres of fuel must be added in
order to be registered by the fuel gauge.
When the low fuel level is reached,
this warning lamp comes on in the
instrument panel, accompanied by
an audible signal and a message in
the multifunction screen. When the lamp first
comes on, there is approximately 6 litres of
fuel remaining.
Until sufficient fuel has been added, this
warning lamp appears every time the ignition
is switched on, accompanied by an audible
signal and a message. When driving, this
audible signal and message are repeated with
increasing frequency, as the fuel level drops
towards "0".
Capacity of the tank: approximately 60 litres.
You must refuel to avoid running out of
fuel.
If you run out of fuel (Diesel), refer also
to the "Checks" section.
The key cannot be removed from the
lock until the cap is put back on the
tank.
Opening the cap may trigger an inrush
of air. This vacuum, which is completely
normal, is caused by the sealing of the
fuel system.
9
Checks
181
3008_en_Chap09_verifications_ed01-2015
To fill the tank safely:
F the engine must be switched off,
F open the fuel filler flap,
F insert the key in the cap, then turn it to
the left,
When refuelling is complete:
F put the cap back in place,
F turn the key to the right, then remove it
from the cap,
F close the filler flap.
F remove the cap and secure it on the hook,
located on the inside of the flap,
F fill the tank, but do not continue after the
3rd cut-off of the nozzle; this could cause
malfunctions.
Operating fault
A malfunction of the fuel gauge is indicated by
the return to zero of the fuel gauge needle.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
With Stop & Start, never refuel with the
system in STOP mode; you must switch
off the ignition with the key.
DIESEL
Checks
182
3008_en_Chap09_verifications_ed01-2015
Fuel used for petrol engines
The petrol engines are compatible with E10
type petrol biofuels (containing 10 % ethanol),
conforming to European standards EN 228
and EN 15376.
E85 type fuels (containing up to 85 % ethanol)
are reserved exclusively for vehicles marketed
for the use of this type of fuel (BioFlex
vehicles). The quality of the ethanol must
comply with European standard EN 15293.
Fuel used for Diesel
engines
The Diesel engines are compatible with
biofuels which conform to current and future
European standards (Diesel fuel which
complies with standard EN 590 mixed with
a biofuel which complies with standard
EN 14214) available at the pumps (containing
up to 7 % Fatty Acid Methyl Ester).
B30 biofuel can be used in certain Diesel
engines. However, this use, even occasional,
requires strict application of the special
servicing conditions. Contact a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
The use of any other type of (bio)fuel
(vegetable or animal oils, pure or diluted,
domestic fuel...) is strictly prohibited (risk of
damage to the engine and fuel system).
9
Checks
183
3008_en_Chap09_verifications_ed01-2015
Misfuel prevention (Diesel)*
When a petrol filler nozzle is introduced into the
fuel filler neck of your Diesel vehicle, it comes
into contact with the flap. The system remains
closed and prevents filling.
Do not persist but introduce a Diesel type
filler nozzle.
Mechanical device which prevents filling the tank of a Diesel vehicle with petrol. It avoids the risk of
engine damage that can result from filling with the wrong fuel.
Located in the filler neck, the misfuel prevention device appears when the filler cap is removed.
Operation
It remains possible to use a fuel can to
fill the tank.
In order to ensure a good flow of fuel,
do not place the nozzle of the fuel can
in direct contact with the flap of the
misfuel prevention device and pour
slowly.
Travelling abroad
As Diesel fuel pump nozzles may be different
in other countries, the presence of the misfuel
prevention device may make refuelling
impossible.
Not all Diesel vehicles are fitted with misfuel
protection, so before travelling abroad, we
recommend that you check with the PEUGEOT
dealer network, whether your vehicle is suitable
for the fuel pumps in the country in which you
intend to travel.
* Depending on the country of sale.
Checks
184
3008_en_Chap09_verifications_ed01-2015
Running out of fuel (Diesel)
Other engines
F Add at least five litres of Diesel fuel to the
tank.
F Open the bonnet.
F If necessary, unclip the styling cover for
access to the priming pump.
F Squeeze and release the priming pump
repeatedly until resistance is felt (there
may be resistance at the first press).
F Operate the starter to start the engine
(if the engine does not start at the first
attempt, wait around 15 seconds before
trying again).
F If the engine does not start after a few
attempts, operate the priming pump again
then start the engine.
F Refit the styling cover and clip it in place.
F Close the bonnet.
On vehicles fitted with Diesel engines, the fuel
system must be primed if you run out of fuel.
For all versions other than BlueHDi, refer to the
corresponding engine compartment view.
For more information on the Diesel
misfuel prevention device, refer to the
corresponding section.
If the engine does not start first time,
don't keep trying but start the procedure
again from the beginning.
BlueHDi engines
F Fill the fuel tank with at least five litres of
Diesel.
F Switch on the ignition (without starting the
engine).
F Wait around 6 seconds and switch off the
ignition.
F Repeat the operation 10 times.
F Operate the starter to run the engine.
9
Checks
185
3008_en_Chap09_verifications_ed01-2015
Bonnet
F Open the front left door.
F Pull the interior bonnet release lever A,
located at the bottom of the door aperture.
F Push the exterior safety catch B to the left
and raise the bonnet.
Closing
F Take the stay out of the support notch.
F Clip the stay in its housing.
F Lower the bonnet and release it at the end
of its travel.
F Pull on the bonnet to check that it is
secured correctly.
Opening
F Unclip the stay C from its housing.
F Fix the stay in the notch to hold the bonnet
open.
Before doing anything under the
bonnet, switch off the Stop & Start
system to avoid any risk of injury
resulting from an automatic change to
START mode.
The location of the interior bonnet
release lever prevents opening of
the bonnet while the front left door is
closed.
Do not open the bonnet in high winds.
When the engine is hot, handle the
exterior safety catch and the bonnet
stay with care (risk of burns).
Because of the presence of electrical
equipment under the bonnet, it is
recommended that exposure to water
(rain, washing, ...) be limited.
The cooling fan may start after
switching off the engine: take care
with articles and clothing that might
become caught by the fan blades.
Checks
186
3008_en_Chap09_verifications_ed01-2015
Underbonnet - petrol engines
The various caps and covers allow access for checking the levels of the various fluids and for replacing certain components.
1. Power steering reservoir.
2. Screenwash and headlamp wash reservoir.
3. Coolant header tank.
4. Brake fluid reservoir.
5. Battery / Fuses.
6. Fusebox.
7. Air filter.
8. Engine oil dipstick.
9. Engine oil filler cap.
10. Earth point ("-" terminal).
9
Checks
187
3008_en_Chap09_verifications_ed01-2015
Underbonnet - Diesel engines
The various caps and covers allow access for checking the levels of the various fluids, for replacing certain components and for priming the fuel system.
1. Power steering reservoir.
2. Screenwash and headlamp wash reservoir.
3. Coolant header tank.
4. Brake fluid reservoir.
5. Battery / Fuses.
6. Fusebox.
7. Air filter.
8. Engine oil dipstick.
9. Engine oil filler cap.
10. Priming pump*.
11. Earth point ("-" terminal).
* Depending on engine.
Checks
188
3008_en_Chap09_verifications_ed01-2015
Checking levels
Engine oil level
The check is carried out either when
the ignition is switched on using the
oil level indicator in the instrument
panel for vehicles so equipped, or
using the dipstick.
Check all of these levels regularly, in line with the manufacturer's service schedule. Top them up if necessary, unless otherwise indicated.
If a level drops significantly, have the corresponding system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
A = MAX
Take care when working under the bonnet, as certain areas of the engine may be extremely hot (risk of burns) and the cooling fan could start at
any time (even with the ignition off).
To ensure that the reading is correct, your
vehicle must be parked on a level surface
with the engine having been off for more
than 30 minutes.
B = MIN
It is normal to top up the oil level between
two services (or oil changes). PEUGEOT
recommends that you check the level, and top
up if necessary, every 3 000 miles (5 000 kms).
Checking using the dipstick
If you find that the level is above the A mark or
below the B mark, do not start the engine.
- If the level is above the MAX mark (risk
of damage to the engine), contact a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
- If the level is below the MIN mark, you
must top up the engine oil.
F Locate the dipstick in the engine
compartment of your vehicle.
For more information on the petrol or Diesel
engine, refer to the corresponding section.
F Take the dipstick by its coloured grip and
remove it completely.
F Wipe the end of the dipstick using a clean
non-fluffy cloth.
F Refit the dipstick and push fully down, then
pull it out again to make the visual check:
the correct level is between the marks A
and B.
9
Checks
189
3008_en_Chap09_verifications_ed01-2015
Power steering fluid level
The power steering fluid level should
be close to the "MAX" mark. With
the engine cold, unscrew the cap to
check the level.
Fluid specication
The brake fluid must conform to the
manufacturer's recommendations.
Changing the uid
Refer to the manufacturer's service schedule
for details of the interval for this operation.
The brake fluid level should be close
to the "MAX" mark. If it is not, check
the brake pad wear.
Brake fluid level
After topping-up the oil, the check when
switching on the ignition with the oil
level indicator in the instrument panel
is not valid during the 30 minutes after
topping up.
Oil grade
Before topping-up the oil or changing the oil,
check that the oil is the correct grade for your
engine and conforms to the manufacturer's
recommendations.
Engine oil change
Refer to the manufacturer's service schedule
for details of the interval for this operation.
In order to maintain the reliability of the engine
and emission control system, never use
additives in the engine oil.
Topping-up the engine oil level
F Locate the oil filler cap in the engine
compartment of your vehicle.
For more information on the petrol or Diesel
engine, refer to the corresponding section.
F Unscrew the oil filler cap to reveal the filler
aperture.
F Add oil in small quantities, avoiding any
spills on engine components (risk of fire).
F Wait a few minutes before checking the
level again using the dipstick.
F Add more oil if necessary.
F After checking the level, carefully refit the
oil filler cap and the dipstick in its tube.
Checks
190
3008_en_Chap09_verifications_ed01-2015
Diesel additive level (Diesel
engine with particle filter)
Used products
Topping up
This additive must be topped up by a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop
without delay.
Fluid specication
For optimum cleaning and to avoid freezing,
this fluid must not be topped up with or
replaced with plain water.
In the case of vehicles fitted with
headlamp washers, the low fluid level
is indicated by an audible signal and
a message in the instrument panel
screen.
Top up the reservoir when you next stop
the vehicle.
Screenwash and headlamp
wash fluid
A low additive level is indicated by
illumination of this warning lamp,
accompanied by an audible warning
and a message in the instrument panel screen.
Avoid prolonged contact of used oil or
fluids with the skin.
Most of these fluids are harmful to
health or indeed very corrosive.
Do not discard used oil or fluids into
sewers or onto the ground.
Take used oil to a PEUGEOT dealer or
a qualified workshop (France) or to an
authorised waste disposal site.
Fluid specication
The coolant must conform to the
manufacturer's recommendations.
The coolant level should be close
to the "MAX" mark but should never
exceed it.
When the engine is warm, the
temperature of the coolant is regulated by
the fan.
In addition, as the cooling system is
pressurised, wait at least one hour after
switching off the engine before carrying out any
work.
To avoid any risk of scalding, unscrew the cap
by two turns to allow the pressure to drop.
When the pressure has dropped, remove the
cap and top up the level.
Coolant level
The cooling fan may start after
switching off the engine: take care
with articles and clothing that might
become caught by the fan blades.
In wintry conditions, the use of an
ethyl alcohol or methanol base fluid is
recommended.
9
Checks
191
3008_en_Chap09_verifications_ed01-2015
Checks
Unless otherwise indicated, check these
components in accordance with the
manufacturer's service schedule and according
to your engine.
Otherwise, have them checked by a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Replace the oil filter each time the
engine oil is changed.
Refer to the manufacturer's
service schedule for details of
the replacement interval for this
component.
Oil filter
Refer to the manufacturer's
service schedule for details of the
replacement intervals for these
components.
Depending on the environment (e.g. dusty
atmosphere) and the use of the vehicle (e.g.
city driving), replace them twice as often if
necessary.
A clogged passenger compartment filter may
have an adverse effect on the performance
of the air conditioning system and generate
undesirable odours.
Air filter and passenger compartment filter
12 V battery
The battery does not require any maintenance.
However, check that the terminals are clean
and correctly tightened, particularly in summer
and winter.
When carrying out work on the battery, refer to the
"12 V battery" section for details of the precautions to be
taken before disconnecting the battery and following its
reconnection.
Particle filter (Diesel)
On a new vehicle, the first particle
filter regeneration operations may be
accompanied by a "burning" smell,
which is perfectly normal.
Following prolonged operation of the
vehicle at very low speed or at idle,
you may, in exceptional circumstances,
notice the emission of water vapour at
the exhaust on acceleration. This does
not affect the behaviour of the vehicle
or the environment.
The presence of this label, in particular
with the Stop & Start system, indicates
the use of a specific 12 V lead-acid
battery with special technology and
specification. The involvement of
a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop is essential when replacing or
disconnecting the battery.
The start of saturation of the particle
filter is indicated by the temporary
illumination of this warning lamp
accompanied by a message in the
multifunction screen.
As soon as the traffic conditions permit,
regenerate the filter by driving at a speed of at
least 40 mph (60 km/h) until the warning lamp
goes off.
If the warning lamp stays on, this indicates a
low additive level.
For more information on checking levels, refer
to the corresponding section.
Checks
192
3008_en_Chap09_verifications_ed01-2015
Brake disc wear
Brake pads
Brake wear depends on the style
of driving, particularly in the case
of vehicles used in town, over short
distances. It may be necessary to
have the condition of the brakes checked, even
between vehicle services.
Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a drop in
the brake fluid level indicates that the brake
pads are worn.
For information on checking brake
disc wear, contact a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Manual gearbox
The gearbox does not require any
maintenance (no oil change).
Refer to the manufacturer's service
schedule for the checking interval
for this component.
Electronic gearbox
The gearbox does not require any
maintenance (no oil change).
Refer to the manufacturer's
service schedule for details of
the level checking interval for this
component.
Automatic gearbox
The gearbox does not require any
maintenance (no oil change).
Refer to the manufacturer's
service schedule for details of
the level checking interval for this
component.
This system does not require any
routine servicing. However, in the
event of a problem, have the system
checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Electric parking brake
Only use products recommended by
PEUGEOT or products of equivalent
quality and specification.
In order to optimise the operation of
units as important as those in the
braking system, PEUGEOT selects and
offers very specific products.
After washing the vehicle, dampness,
or in wintry conditions, ice can form
on the brake discs and pads: braking
efficiency may be reduced. Make light
brake applications to dry and defrost
the brakes.
For more information on the
electric parking brake, refer to the
corresponding section.
9
Checks
193
3008_en_Chap09_verifications_ed01-2015
AdBlue
®
additive and SCR system
for BlueHDi Diesel engines
To assure respect for the environment and
conformity with the new Euro 6 emissions
standard, without adversely affecting the
performance or fuel consumption of Diesel
engines, PEUGEOT has taken the decision to
equip its vehicles with an effective system that
associates SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction)
with a particle filter (FAP) for the treatment of
exhaust gases.
Presentation of the SCR system
Using an additive called AdBlue
®
containing
urea, a catalytic converter turns up to 85%
of nitrous oxides (NOx) into nitrogen and
water, which are harmless to health and the
environment.
The AdBlue
®
additive is held in a special
tank located under the boot at the rear of
the vehicle. It has a capacity of 17 litres: this
provides a driving range of about 12 500 miles
(20 000 km), after which an alert is triggered
warning you when the reserve remaining is
enough for just 1 500 miles (2 400 km).
During each scheduled service of your vehicle
by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop,
the AdBlue
®
additive tank is refilled in order to
allow normal operation of the SCR system.
If the estimated mileage between two services
is greater than 12 500 miles (20 000 km), we
recommend that you go to a PEUGEOT dealer
or a qualified workshop to have the necessary
top-up carried out.
Once the AdBlue
®
tank is empty,
a system required by regulations
prevents starting of the engine.
If the SCR is faulty, the level of
emissions from your vehicle will no
longer meet the Euro 6 standard: you
vehicle becomes polluting.
In the event of a confirmed fault
with the SCR system, you must go
to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop as soon as possible: after
a running distance of 650 miles
(1 100 km), a system will be triggered
automatically to prevent engine starting.
Checks
194
3008_en_Chap09_verifications_ed01-2015
Range indicators
The engine start prevention system
required by regulations is activated
automatically once the AdBlue
®
tank is
empty.
Once the AdBlue
®
tank is on reserve or after
detection of a fault with the SCR emissions
control system, when the ignition is switched
on, an indicator displays an estimate of the
distance that can be covered, the range, before
engine starting is prevented.
In the event of simultaneous system fault and
low AdBlue
®
level, the shortest range figure is
the one displayed.
Range greater than 1 500 miles (2 400 km)
When the ignition is switched on, no
information on range is displayed automatically
in the instrument panel.
Pressing this button displays the driving range
temporarily.
Above 3 000 miles (5 000 km), the value is not
specified.
In the event of the risk of non-starting related to a lack of AdBlue
®
9
Checks
195
3008_en_Chap09_verifications_ed01-2015
Remaining range between 350 and 1500 miles (600 and 2 400 km)
When switching on the ignition, the UREA
warning lamp comes on, accompanied
by an audible signal and the display of a
message (e.g.: "Top up emissions additive:
Starting prevented in 900 miles") indicating
the remaining range expressed in miles or
kilometres.
When driving, the message is displayed every
200 miles (300 km) until the additive tank has
been topped-up.
Go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop to have the AdBlue
®
tank topped-up.
You can also top-up the tank yourself.
For more information on topping-up the
AdBlue
®
additive, refer to the corresponding
section.
Remaining range between 0 and 350 miles (0 and 600 km)
When switching on the ignition, the SERVICE
warning lamp comes on and the UREA warning
lamp flashes, accompanied by an audible
signal and the display of a message (e.g. "Top
up emissions additive: Starting prevented in
350 miles") indicating the remaining range
expressed in miles or kilometres.
When driving, the message is displayed every
30 seconds until the additive tank has been
topped-up.
Go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop to have the AdBlue
®
tank topped-up.
You can also top-up the tank yourself.
Otherwise you will not be able to restart your
engine.
Breakdown related to a lack of AdBlue
®
additive
For more information on topping-up
the AdBlue
®
additive, refer to the
corresponding section.
To be able to start the engine,
we recommend that you call on a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop for the top-up required.
If you carry out the top-up yourself, it
is essential to add at least 3.8 litres of
AdBlue
®
to the tank.
When switching on the ignition, the SERVICE
warning lamp comes on and the UREA warning
lamp flashes, accompanied by an audible
signal and the display of the message "Top up
emissions additive: Starting prevented".
The AdBlue
®
tank is empty: the system required
by regulations prevents engine starting.
Checks
196
3008_en_Chap09_verifications_ed01-2015
In the event of a fault with the
SCR emissions control system
A system that prevents engine starting
is activated automatically from
650 miles (1 100 km) after confirmation
of a fault with the SCR emissions
control system. Have the system
checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop as soon as possible.
In the event of the detection of a fault
The UREA, SERVICE and diagnostic warning
lamps comes on, accompanied by an audible
signal and the display of the message
"Emissions fault".
The alert is triggered when driving when the
fault is detected for the first time, then when
switching on the ignition for subsequent
journeys, while the fault persists.
If it is a temporary fault, the alert
disappears during the next journey,
after self-diagnosis of the SCR system.
During an authorised driving phase (between
650 miles and 0 miles) (1 100 km and 0 km)
If a fault with the SCR system is confirmed
(after 30 miles (50 km) covered with the
permanent display of the message signalling
a fault), the SERVICE and engine diagnostic
warning lamps come on and the UREA
warning lamp flashes, accompanied by an
audible signal and the display of a message
(e.g.: "Emissions fault: Starting prevented in
150 miles") indicating the remaining range
express in miles or kilometres.
While driving, the message is displayed every
30 seconds while the fault with the SCR system
persists.
The alert is repeated when switching on the
ignition.
You should go to a PEUGEOT dealer or
a qualified workshop as soon as possible.
Otherwise, you will not be able to restart your
engine.
9
Checks
197
3008_en_Chap09_verifications_ed01-2015
You have exceeded the authorised
driving limit: the starting prevention
system inhibits engine starting.
Starting prevented
Every time the ignition is switched on, the
SERVICE and engine diagnostic warning
lamps come on and the UREA warning lamp
flashes, accompanied by an audible signal and
the display of the message "Emissions fault:
Starting prevented".
Freezing of the AdBlue
®
additive
To be able to start the engine, you must call on
a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
The AdBlue
®
additive freezes at
temperatures below around -11°C.
The SCR system includes a heater
for the AdBlue
®
tank, allowing you to
continue driving in very cold conditions.
Checks
198
3008_en_Chap09_verifications_ed01-2015
Topping-up the AdBlue
®
additive
Precautions in use
Keep AdBlue
®
out of the reach of
children, in its original bottle.
Never transfer AdBlue
®
to another
container: it would lose its purity.
Use only AdBlue
®
additive that meets the
ISO 22241 standard.
The AdBlue
®
additive is an urea-based
solution. This liquid is non-flammable,
colourless and odourless (kept in a cool area).
In the event of contact with the skin, wash
the affected area with soap and water. In the
event of contact with the eyes, wash (irrigate)
the eyes with large amounts of water or with
an eye wash solution for at least 15 minutes.
If a burning sensation or irritation persists, get
medical attention.
If swallowed, immediately wash out the mouth
with clean water and then drink plenty of water.
In certain conditions (high ambient
temperature, for example), the risk of release
of ammonia cannot be excluded: do not inhale
the product. Ammonia vapour has en irritant
effect on mucous membranes (eyes, nose and
throat).
Never dilute the additive with water.
Never pour the additive into the Diesel
fuel tank.
The supply in a non-drip bottle simplifies
toping-up. You can obtain 1.89 litre (half a US
gallon) bottles from a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Never top-up from an AdBlue
®
dispenser reserved for heavy goods
vehicles.
Filling the AdBlue
®
tank is an operation
included in every routine service on your
vehicle by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Nevertheless, given the capacity of the tank,
it may be necessary to top-up the additive
between services, more particularly if an alert
(warning lamps and a message) signals the
requirement.
You can got to a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
If you envisage topping-up yourself, please
read the following warnings carefully.
9
Checks
199
3008_en_Chap09_verifications_ed01-2015
Never store bottles of AdBlue
®
in your
vehicle.
Recommendations on storage
AdBlue
®
freezes at about -11°C and
deteriorates above 25°C. It is recommended
that bottles be stored in a cool area and
protected from direct sunlight.
Under these conditions, the additive can be
kept for at least a year.
If the additive has frozen, it can be used once it
has completely thawed out.
Procedure
Before topping-up, ensure that the vehicle is
parked on a flat and level surface.
In wintry conditions, ensure that the
temperature of the vehicle is above -11°C.
Otherwise, by freezing, the AdBlue
®
cannot
be poured into its tank. Park your vehicle in a
warmer area for a few hours to allow the top-up
to be carried out.
F Switch off the ignition and remove the key.
F Place the adjustable boot floor at an angle
(see the "Fittings" section) and raise the
boot floor for access to the AdBlue
®
tank.
Secure the boot floor by attaching its
cords to the hooks on the load space cover
support.
F Unclip the black plastic blanking plug using
a lever.
F Insert your fingers into the aperture and
turn the blue cap a 6
th
of a turn anti-
clockwise.
F Carefully lift off the cap, without dropping it.
Checks
200
3008_en_Chap09_verifications_ed01-2015
F Obtain a bottle of AdBlue
®
. After first
checking the use-by date, read carefully
the instructions on use on the label before
pouring the contents of the bottle into your
vehicle's AdBlue
®
tank.
Important: if your vehicle's AdBlue
®
tank is completely empty - which is
confirmed by the alert messages
and the impossibility of starting the
engine - you must add at least 3.8 litres
(so two 1.89 litre bottles).
F After emptying the bottle, wipe away any
spillage around the tank filler using a damp
cloth.
If any additive is split or splashed, wash
immediately with cold water or wipe with
a damp cloth.
If the additive has crystallised, clean it
off using a sponge and hot water.
F Refit the blue cap to the tank and turn it
a 6
th
of a turn clockwise, to its stop.
F Refit the black plastic blanking plug,
clipping it in place.
F Lower the boot floor and the adjustable
floor.
Important: in the event of a top-up
after a breakdown because of a lack
of additive, signalled by the message
"Top up emissions additive: Starting
prevented", you must wait around
5 minutes before switching on the ignition,
without opening the driver's door,
locking the vehicle or introducing the
key into the ignition switch.
Switch on the ignition, then, after
10 seconds, start the engine.
Never dispose of AdBlue
®
additive
bottles in the household waste. Place
them in a special container provided
this purpose or take them to your dealer.
10
Practical information
201
3008_en_Chap10_infos-pratiques_ed01-2015
Tool kit
This is a set of tools provided with the vehicle. The content depends on your vehicle's equipment (temporary puncture repair kit or spare wheel).
Access to the tools
The main tools are stowed in the boot under
the floor.
For access to them:
F open the boot,
F place the adjustable boot floor at an angle
(refer to the "Fittings" section),
F raise the floor,
F secure it by hooking its cords on the hooks
on the load space cover support,
For versions with a standard or
"space-saver" spare wheel
F remove the polystyrene storage box,
F unclip by pulling at the top then remove the
carrier containing the tools.
For BlueHDi versions with
"space-saver" spare wheel
F remove the spare wheel,
F remove the polystyrene storage box,
F push the jack forwards then lift it at the
rear.
Practical information
202
3008_en_Chap10_infos-pratiques_ed01-2015
List of tools
All of these tools are specific to your vehicle.
Do not use them for other purposes.
1. A chock to immobilise the vehicle
(depending on equipment).
2. Removable towing eye.
Refer to the "Towing the vehicle section".
3. Socket for the security bolts (located in the
glove box) (depending on equipment).
For adapting the wheelbrace to the special
"security" bolts.
4. Temporary puncture repair kit.
Comprises a 12 V compressor and a
cartridge of sealant for the temporary
repair of a tyre; can be used to adjust tyre
pressures.
Refer to the "Temporary puncture repair
kit" section.
5. Wheelbrace.
For removing the wheel trim and removing
the wheel bolts.
6. Jack with integral handle.
For raising the vehicle.
7. Wheel bolt cover removal tool (depending
on equipment).
For removing the wheel bolt head finishers
on alloy wheels.
8. Wheel centre guide (depending on
equipment).
For refitting an alloy wheel to the hub.
For versions without spare
wheel:
For versions without spare
wheel:
10
Practical information
203
3008_en_Chap10_infos-pratiques_ed01-2015
Temporary puncture repair kit
The kit is stowed in the boot under the floor, in the polystyrene storage box.
This kit consists of a compressor and a sealant cartridge.
It allows the temporary repair of a tyre.
You are then able to go to the nearest garage.
It is designed to repair most punctures which could affect the tyre, located on the tyre tread or shoulder.
Its compressor can be used to check and adjust the pressure of the tyre.
Access to the kit
The vehicle's electric system allows the
connection of a compressor for long
enough to inflate a tyre after a puncture
repair or for inflating a small inflatable
accessory.
Practical information
204
3008_en_Chap10_infos-pratiques_ed01-2015
Description of the kit
A. "Sealant" or "Air" position selector.
B. On "I" / off "O" switch.
C. Deflation button.
D. Pressure gauge (in bar and psi).
E. Compartment housing:
- a cable with adaptor for 12 V socket,
- various inflation adaptors for
accessories, such as balls, bicycle
tyres...
F. Sealant cartridge.
G. White pipe with cap for repair.
H. Black pipe for inflation.
I. Speed limit sticker.
The speed limit sticker I must be affixed
to the vehicle's steering wheel to remind
you that a wheel is in temporary use.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h) when driving with a tyre
repaired using this type of kit.
10
Practical information
205
3008_en_Chap10_infos-pratiques_ed01-2015
Repair procedure
F Switch off the ignition.
1. Sealing
F Uncoil the white pipe G fully.
F Unscrew the cap from the white pipe.
F Connect the white pipe to the valve of the
tyre to be repaired.
F Connect the compressor's electric plug to
the vehicle's 12 V socket.
F Start the vehicle and leave the engine
running.
F Turn the selector A to the
"sealant" position.
F Check that the switch B is in
position "O".
Take care, this product is harmful
(e.g. ethylene-glycol, colophony...) if
swallowed and causes irritation to the eyes.
Keep this product out of the reach of
children.
Avoid removing any foreign bodies
which have penetrated into the tyre.
Do not start the compressor before
connecting the white pipe to the tyre
valve: the sealant product would be
expelled through the pipe.
Practical information
206
3008_en_Chap10_infos-pratiques_ed01-2015
F Remove the kit and screw the cap back on
the white pipe.
Take care to avoid staining your vehicle
with traces of fluid. Keep the kit to hand.
F Drive immediately for approximately
three miles (five kilometres), at reduced
speed (between 15 and 35 mph (20 and
60 km/h)), to plug the puncture.
F Stop to check the repair and the tyre
pressure using the kit.
F Switch on the compressor by moving
the switch B to position "I" until the tyre
pressure reaches 2.0 bars.
The sealant is injected into the tyre under
pressure; do not disconnect the pipe from
the valve during this operation (risk of
splashing).
If after around 5 to 7 minutes the
pressure is not attained, this indicates
that the tyre is not repairable; contact
a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop for assistance.
Tyre under-ination detection
If the vehicle is fitted with tyre under-
inflation detection, the under-inflation
warning lamp will remain on after the
wheel has been repaired until the
system is reinitialised by a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
10
Practical information
207
3008_en_Chap10_infos-pratiques_ed01-2015
F Turn the selector A to the "air"
position.
F Uncoil the black pipe H fully.
F Connect the black pipe to the
valve of the wheel.
F Connect the compressor's electric plug to
the vehicle's 12 V socket.
F Start the vehicle again and leave the
engine running.
F Adjust the pressure using the compressor
(to inflate: switch B in position "I"; to
deflate: switch B in position "O" and press
button C), in accordance with the vehicle's
tyre pressure label (located on the left
hand door aperture).
A loss of pressure indicates that the
puncture has not been fully plugged;
contact a PEUGEOT dealer or qualified
workshop for assistance.
F Remove and stow the kit.
F Drive at reduced speed (50 mph [80 km/h]
max) limiting the distance travelled to
approximately 120 miles (200 km).
2. Ination
As soon as possible, go to a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
You must inform the technician that you
have used this kit. After inspection, the
technician will advise you on whether
the tyre can be repaired or if it must be
replaced.
Practical information
208
3008_en_Chap10_infos-pratiques_ed01-2015
Removing the cartridge
F Stow the black pipe.
F Detach the angled base from the white pipe.
F Support the compressor vertically.
F Unscrew the cartridge from the bottom.
Checking tyre pressures /
inflating accessories
F Turn the selector A to the "Air"
position.
F Uncoil the black pipe H fully.
F Connect the black pipe to the
valve of the wheel or accessory.
If necessary, fit one of the adaptors
supplied with the kit first.
You can also use the compressor, without
injecting any product, to:
- check or adjust the pressure of your tyres,
- inflate other accessories (balls, bicycle
tyres...).
F Connect the compressor's electrical
connector to the vehicle's 12 V socket.
F Start the vehicle and let the engine run.
F Adjust the pressure using the compressor
(to inflate: switch B in position "I"; to
deflate: switch B in position "O" and press
button C), according to the vehicle's tyre
pressure label or the accessory's pressure
label.
F Remove the kit then stow it.
Beware of discharges of fluid.
The expiry date of the fluid is indicated
on the cartridge.
The sealant cartridge is designed for
single use; even if only partly used, it
must be replaced.
After use, do not discard the cartridge
into the environment, take it to an
authorised waste disposal site or a
PEUGEOT dealer.
Do not forget to obtain a new sealant
cartridge, available from PEUGEOT
dealers or from a qualified workshop.
10
Practical information
209
3008_en_Chap10_infos-pratiques_ed01-2015
Putting the wheel back in place
F Put the wheel back in its housing.
F Unscrew the yellow central bolt by a few
turns then put it in place in the centre of the
wheel*.
F Tighten fully until the central bolt clicks to
retain the wheel correctly*.
Changing a wheel
Spare wheel
The spare wheel is installed in the boot under
the floor.
Depending on equipment, the spare wheel may
be steel, alloy or of the "space-saver" type.
For access to it, refer to the "Tool kit" section.
Taking out the wheel
F Unscrew the yellow central bolt*.
F Raise the spare wheel towards you from
the rear.
F Take the wheel out of the boot.
Procedure for removing a wheel with a damaged or punctured tyre and fitting the spare wheel using the tools supplied with the vehicle.
See the "Tool kit" section.
* Except BlueHDi versions.
BlueHDi versions only: the spare wheel
is placed on the tools.
Do not forget to secure the jack at the
bottom of the well and refit the storage
box before returning the spare wheel.
The jack must only be used for changing a
wheel with a damaged or punctured tyre.
The jack does not require any
maintenance.
Practical information
210
3008_en_Chap10_infos-pratiques_ed01-2015
Tyre under-ination detection
The space-saver type or steel spare
wheel does not have a sensor.
The punctured wheel must be repaired
by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Removing a wheel
F Remove the bolt cover from each of the
bolts using the tool 7 (depending on
equipment).
F Fit the security socket 3 on the
wheelbrace 5 to slacken the security bolt
(if your vehicle has them).
F Slacken the other bolts using the
wheelbrace 5 only.
Parking the vehicle
Immobilise the vehicle where it does not
block traffic: the ground must be level,
stable and not slippery.
Apply the parking brake unless it has
been programmed to automatic mode.
Switch off the ignition.
With a manual gearbox, engage first
gear to block the wheels.
With an electronic gearbox, place the
lever in position R to block the wheels.
With an automatic gearbox, place the
lever in position P to block the wheels.
Check that the braking warning lamp
and the P warning lamp in the parking
brake control lever come on.
If necessary, place a chock under the
wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be changed.
The occupants must get out of the
vehicle and wait where they are safe.
Never go underneath a vehicle
supported by a jack; use an axle stand.
F Put the carrier back in place in the centre
of the wheel and clip it in place*.
F Put the polystyrene storage box back in
place*.
Wheel with wheel trim
When removing the wheel, first
remove the wheel trim using the
wheelbrace 5 by pulling at the valve
cut-out.
When refitting the wheel, refit the
wheel trim by placing its cut-out at the
valve, and press round its edge with the
palm of your hand.
Do not use:
- the jack for any purpose other than
lifting the vehicle,
- any jack other than the one
supplied by the manufacturer.
10
Practical information
211
3008_en_Chap10_infos-pratiques_ed01-2015
F Position the foot of the jack 6 on the
ground and ensure that it is directly below
one of the front A or rear B jacking points
provided on the underbody, whichever is
closest to the wheel to be changed.
F Extend the jack until its head comes into
contact with the jacking point A or B; the
contact zone A or B must be correctly
engaged with the middle of the head of the
jack.
F Raise the vehicle until there is sufficient
space between the wheel and the ground
to admit the spare (not punctured) wheel
easily.
Ensure that the jack is stable. If the
ground is slippery or loose, the jack
might slip or drop - Risk of injury!
Position the jack only at the jacking
point A or B under the vehicle,
ensuring that the vehicle's contact
zone is correctly centred on the head
of the jack. Otherwise there is a risk
of damage to the vehicle and the jack
might drop - Risk of injury!
Practical information
212
3008_en_Chap10_infos-pratiques_ed01-2015
F Remove the bolts and store them in a clean
place.
F Remove the wheel.
Fitting a wheel
Fitting the "space-saver"
spare wheel
If your vehicle is fitted with alloy wheels,
when tightening the bolts on fitting, it
is normal to notice that the washers do
not come into contact with the "space-
saver" spare wheel. The wheel is
secured by the conical contact surface
of each bolt.
F Put the wheel in place on the hub using the
centre guide 8.
F Screw in the bolts fully by hand.
F Using the wheelbrace 5 fitted with the
security socket 3, pre-tighten the security
bolt (if your vehicle has them).
F Pre-tighten the other bolts using the
wheelbrace 5 only.
10
Practical information
213
3008_en_Chap10_infos-pratiques_ed01-2015
F Lower the vehicle fully.
F Fold the jack 6 and detach it.
F Using the wheelbrace 5 fitted with the
security socket 3, tighten the security bolt
(if your vehicle has them).
F Tighten the other bolts using the
wheelbrace 5 only.
F Refit the bolt covers to each of the bolts
(according to equipment).
F Stow the tools in the box.
After changing a wheel
To stow the punctured wheel in place
of the spare wheel, first remove the
central cover.
When driving with the "space-saver"
type spare wheel fitted, do not
exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
Have the tightness of the bolts and the
pressure of the spare wheel checked
by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Have the punctured wheel repaired
and refit it to the vehicle as soon as
possible.
With BlueHDi versions, the punctured
wheel cannot be stowed in place of the
space-saver spare wheel.
Use a cover to protect the boot.
Snow chains must only be fitted to the
front wheels. They must not be fitted to
a "space-saver" type of spare wheel.
If you have to fit snow chains with a
"space-saver" type of spare wheel in
use on a front wheel, interchange the
front and rear wheels on that side of the
vehicle.
Practical information
214
3008_en_Chap10_infos-pratiques_ed01-2015
Snow chains
In wintry conditions, snow chains improve traction as well as the behaviour of the vehicle when
braking.
The snow chains must be fitted only
to the front wheels. They must never
be fitted to "space-saver" type spare
wheels.
Take account of the legislation in force in your
country on the use of snow chains and the
maximum running speed authorised.
Advice on installation
Avoid driving with snow chains on roads
that have been cleared of snow, to
avoid damaging your vehicle's tyres and
the road surface. If your vehicle is fitted
with alloy wheels, check that no part of
the chain or its fixings is in contact with
the wheel rim.
For more information on snow chains,
contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Use only the chains designed to be fitted to the
type of wheel fitted to your vehicle:
Original tyre size Maximum link size.
215/60 R16
9 mm225/50 R17
235/45 R18
F If you have to fit the chains during a
journey, stop the vehicle on a flat surface
on the side of the road.
F Apply the parking brake and position any
wheel chocks to prevent movement of your
vehicle.
F Fit the chains following the instructions
provided by the manufacturer.
F Move off gently and drive for a few
moments, without exceeding 30 mph
(50 km/h).
F Stop your vehicle and check that the snow
chains are correctly tightened.
It is strongly recommended that before
you leave, you practise fitting the snow
chains on a level and dry surface.
10
Practical information
215
3008_en_Chap10_infos-pratiques_ed01-2015
Changing a bulb
Model with halogen headlamps
1. Direction indicators
(light-emitting diodes - LEDs).
2. Main beam headlamps (HB3).
3. Dipped beam headlamps (H7).
4. Daytime running lamps/sidelamps
(light-emitting diodes - LEDs).
5. Foglamps (PS24W).
1. Direction indicators (light-emitting
diodes - LEDs).
2. Dipped / main beam directional
headlamps (D1S).
3. Daytime running lamps / sidelamps
(light-emitting diodes - LEDs).
4. Foglamps (PS24W).
Model with xenon and directional
headlamps
Front lamps
The headlamps are fitted with
polycarbonate glass with a protective
coating:
F do not clean them using a dry
or abrasive cloth, nor with a
detergent or solvent product,
F use a sponge and soapy water or
a pH neutral product,
F when using a high pressure washer
on persistent marks, do not keep
the lance directed towards the
lamps or their edges for too long,
so as not to damage their protective
coating and seals.
Risk of electrocution
Xenon bulbs (D1S) must be replaced
by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Changing a bulb should only be done
after the headlamp has been switched
off for several minutes (risk of serious
burns).
F Do not touch the bulb directly with
your fingers, use a lint-free cloth.
It is imperative to use only anti-
ultraviolet (UV) type bulbs to avoid
damaging the headlamp.
Always replace a failed bulb with a
new bulb with the same type and
specification.
Practical information
216
3008_en_Chap10_infos-pratiques_ed01-2015
Changing main beam headlamp
bulbs (model with halogen
headlamps)
Changing dipped beam headlamp
bulbs (models with halogen
headlamps)
F Remove the protective plastic cover by
pulling the tab.
F Disconnect the bulb connector.
F Extract the bulb by pulling and change it.
To refit, carry out these operations in reverse
order.
F Remove the protective plastic cover by
pulling the tab.
F Without disconnecting the connector, turn
the body of the bulb a quarter of a turn to
the left to disengage the assembly.
F Disconnect the connector to release the
bulb.
To refit, carry out these operations in reverse
order.
Changing direction indicators
and daytime running lamps /
sidelamps
For the replacement of these LED (light-
emitting diode) lamps, contact a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
10
Practical information
217
3008_en_Chap10_infos-pratiques_ed01-2015
Changing foglamp bulbs
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
F Insert a screwdriver towards the centre of
the repeater between the repeater and the
base of the mirror.
F Tilt the screwdriver to extract the repeater
and remove it.
F Disconnect the repeater connector.
Changing integrated direction
indicator side repeaters
Changing dipped beam
and main beam headlamp
bulbs (models with xenon
headlamps)
D1S xenon bulbs must be changed by a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop
as there is a risk of electrocution.
It is recommended that all D1S bulbs are
changed at the same time if one of them
fails.
You can also contact a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop to have
these lamps changed.
To refit, carry out these operations in reverse
order.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop to obtain a new repeater.
Practical information
218
3008_en_Chap10_infos-pratiques_ed01-2015
Rear lamps
1. Brake lamps / sidelamps
(light-emitting diodes - LEDs).
2. Reversing lamps (W16W).
3. Direction indicators (P21W).
4. Sidelamps
(light-emitting diodes - LEDs).
5. Foglamps (P21W).
- Turn the the lamp unit over.
- Press the five tabs and remove the bulb
holder.
Changing reversing lamp and
direction indicator bulbs
F Raise the tailgate.
F Remove the plastic cover.
F Unscrew the two fixing nuts.
F Extract the lamp unit carefully from the
outside.
F Disconnect the bulb holder connector.
- Reversing lamp (2): pull on the bulb to
remove it.
- Direction indicator (3): turn the bulb a quarter
of a turn (anti-clockwise) to remove it.
To refit, carry out these operations in reverse
order.
10
Practical information
219
3008_en_Chap10_infos-pratiques_ed01-2015
Changing sidelamp and brake
lamp/sidelamp bulbs
Changing foglamp bulbs
For the replacement of these LED (light-
emitting diode) lamps, contact a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
F Reach under the bumper.
F Turn the bulb a quarter of a turn and pull it
out.
Changing the third brake lamp
(light emitting diodes - LEDs)
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Practical information
220
3008_en_Chap10_infos-pratiques_ed01-2015
Changing the number plate lamp
bulbs (W5W)
F Insert a thin screwdriver into one of the
outer holes of the lens.
F Push it outwards to unclip.
F Remove the lens.
F Pull the bulb out and change it.
10
Practical information
221
3008_en_Chap10_infos-pratiques_ed01-2015
Changing a fuse
The extraction tweezer is fitted to the back of
the dashboard fusebox cover.
To gain access to it:
F Remove the cover completely.
F Remove the tweezer.
Changing a fuse
Good Failed
F Use the special tweezer to extract the fuse
from its housing.
F Always replace the faulty fuse with a fuse
of the same rating.
F Check that the number marked on the
fusebox, the rating marked on the fuse and
the following tables all agree.
Before changing a fuse, the cause of the failure
must be identified and rectified.
F Identify the failed fuse by checking the
condition of its filament.
Procedure for replacing a failed fuse with a new fuse to rectify a failure of the corresponding function.
The replacement of a fuse not
mentioned in the tables below may
cause a serious malfunction on your
vehicle.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
PEUGEOT will not accept responsibility
for the cost incurred in repairing your
vehicle or for rectifying malfunctions
resulting from the installation of
accessories not supplied and not
recommended by PEUGEOT and
not installed in accordance with its
instructions, in particular when the
combined consumption of all of the
additional equipment connected
exceeds 10 milliamperes.
Access to the tools
Installing electrical
accessories
Your vehicle's electrical system is
designed to operate with standard or
optional equipment.
Before installing other electrical
equipment or accessories on your
vehicle, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or
a qualified workshop.
Practical information
222
3008_en_Chap10_infos-pratiques_ed01-2015
The fusebox is placed in the lower dashboard.
Dashboard fuses
Fuse tables
Fuse
N°
Rating
(A)
Functions
F1 15 Rear wiper.
F2 - Not used.
F3 5 Airbag control unit.
F4 10
Electrochrome rear view mirror, air conditioning, switching and
protection unit, rear multimedia.
F5 30 Front one-touch electric windows.
F6 30 Rear one-touch electric windows.
F7 5
Front and rear courtesy lamps, map reading lamps, rear
reading lamps, sun visor lighting, glove box lighting, centre
armrest lighting, boot 12 V relay control.
10
Practical information
223
3008_en_Chap10_infos-pratiques_ed01-2015
Access to the fuses
F Refer to the paragraph "Access to the
tools".
Fuse
N°
Rating
(A)
Functions
F8 20
Audio equipment, audio/telephone, CD changer, multifunction
scren, tyre under-inflation detection, alarm siren, alarm control
unit, telematic unit.
F9 30 Front 12 V socket, cigarette lighter, rear 12 V socket.
F10 15 Steering mounted controls.
F11 15 Low current ignition switch.
F12 15
Trailer presence, rain / sunshine sensor, supply for fuses F32,
F34, F35.
F13 5 Engine fusebox, airbag control unit.
F14 15 Instrument panel, instrument panel screen, supply for fuse F33.
F15 30 Locking and deadlocking.
F17 40 Heated rear screen, supply for fuse F30.
Practical information
224
3008_en_Chap10_infos-pratiques_ed01-2015
Fuse
N°
Rating
(A)
Functions
F30 5 Heated door mirrors.
F31 30 Boot 12 V socket.
F32 5 Electronic gearbox gear lever.
F33 10 Head-up display, Bluetooth system, air conditioning.
F34 5 Seat belt warning lamp display.
F35 10 Parking sensors, Hi-Fi amplifier authorisation.
F36 10 Trailer fusebox control unit, driver's door control pad.
F37 20 Hi-Fi amplifier.
F38 30 Driver's electric seat.
F39 20 Panoramic sunroof blind.
10
Practical information
225
3008_en_Chap10_infos-pratiques_ed01-2015
Engine compartment fuses
The fusebox is placed in the engine
compartment near the battery.
Fuse
N°
Rating
(A)
Functions
F2 15 Horn.
F3 10 Front / rear wash-wipe.
F4 10 Daytime running lamps.
F5 15
Purge canister, turbine discharge and Turbo pressure
regulation electrovalves (1.6 litre THP), oil vapour heater
(1.6 litre THP), diesel heater (1.6 litre HDi).
F6 10
Diagnostic socket, directional headlamps, particle filter pump
(Diesel), Distance alert, mirror adjustment control.
F7 10
Power steering control unit, automatic gearbox, directional
headlamps height adjustment motor.
F8 20 Starter motor control.
F9 10 Clutch and brake pedal switches.
F11 40 Air conditioning fan.
Access to the fuses
F Unclip the cover.
F Change the fuse (see corresponding
paragraph).
F When you have finished, close the cover
carefully to ensure correct sealing of the
fusebox.
Fuse table
Practical information
226
3008_en_Chap10_infos-pratiques_ed01-2015
Fuse
N°
Rating
(A)
Functions
F12 30 Windscreen wipers slow / fast speed.
F14 30 Air pump.
F15 10 Right-hand main beam headlamp.
F16 10 Left-hand main beam headlamp.
F17 15 Left-hand dipped headlamp.
F18 15 Right-hand dipped headlamp.
10
Practical information
227
3008_en_Chap10_infos-pratiques_ed01-2015
Fuse
N°
Rating
(A)
Functions
F2 5 Dual function brake switch.
F3 5 Battery charge unit.
F4 25 ABS/DSC electrovalves.
F6 15 Electronic / automatic gearbox.
Table of fuses above the battery
Practical information
228
3008_en_Chap10_infos-pratiques_ed01-2015
12 V battery
Access to the battery
The battery is located under the bonnet.
To gain access to it:
F open the bonnet using the interior release
lever, then the exterior safety catch,
F secure the bonnet stay,
F remove the plastic cover on the (+)
terminal.
The presence of this label, in particular with the
Stop & Start system, indicates the use of a 12 V
lead-acid battery with special technology and
specification; the involvement of a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop is essential
when replacing or disconnecting the battery.
After refitting the battery, the Stop & Start
system will only be active after a continuous
period of immobilisation of the vehicle, a period
which depends on the climatic conditions and
the state of charge of the battery (up to about
8 hours).
With Stop & Start, the battery does not have to
be disconnected for charging.
Procedure for starting the engine using another
battery or charging a discharged battery.
Disconnecting the (+) cable
F Raise the locking tab D fully to release the
cable terminal clamp E.
Reconnecting the (+) cable
F Position the open clamp E of the cable on
the positive post (+) of the battery.
F Press vertically on the clamp E to position
it correctly on the battery.
F Lock the clamp by spreading the
positioning lug and then lowering the tab D.
Do not apply excessive force on the
tab as locking will not be possible if the
clamp is not positioned correctly; start
the procedure again.
10
Practical information
229
3008_en_Chap10_infos-pratiques_ed01-2015
When your vehicle's battery is discharged, the
engine can be started using a slave battery
(external or on another vehicle) and jump lead
cables.
Starting using another
battery
F Remove the plastic cover from the (+)
terminal, if your vehicle has one.
F Connect the red cable to the positive
terminal (+) of the flat battery A, then to the
positive terminal (+) of the slave battery B.
F Connect one end of the green or black
cable to the negative terminal (-) of the
slave battery B (or earth point on the other
vehicle).
F Connect the other end of the green or black
cable to the earth point C on the broken
down vehicle (or on the engine mounting).
F Start the engine of the vehicle with the
good battery and leave it running for a
few minutes.
F Operate the starter on the broken down
vehicle and let the engine run.
If the engine does not start straight away,
switch off the ignition and wait a few moments
before trying again.
First check that the slave battery has a
nominal voltage of 12 V and a capacity
at least equal to that of the discharged
battery.
Do not try to start the engine by
connecting a battery charger.
Do not disconnect the (+) terminal when
the engine is running.
F Wait until the engine returns to idle then
disconnect the jump lead cables in the
reverse order.
F Refit the plastic cover to the (+) terminal,
if your vehicle has one.
Practical information
230
3008_en_Chap10_infos-pratiques_ed01-2015
Following reconnection of the
battery
Following reconnection of the battery, switch on
the ignition and wait 1 minute before starting to
permit initialisation of the electronic systems.
However, if problems remain following this
operation, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Referring to the corresponding section, you
must yourself reinitialise (depending on
version):
- the remote control key,
- the electric blind(s),
- ...
Before disconnecting the battery
Wait 2 minutes after switching off the ignition
before disconnecting the battery.
Close the windows and the doors before
disconnecting the battery.
Charging the battery using
a battery charger
F Disconnect the battery from the vehicle.
F Follow the instructions for use provided by
the manufacturer of the charger.
F Connect the battery starting with the
negative terminal (-).
F Check that the terminals and connectors
are clean. If they are covered with sulphate
(whitish or greenish deposit), remove them
and clean them.
The batteries contain harmful substances
such as sulphuric acid and lead. They
must be disposed of in accordance
with regulations and must not, in any
circumstances, be discarded with household
waste.
Take used remote control batteries and
vehicle batteries to a special collection point.
It is advisable to disconnect the battery
if the vehicle is to be left unused for
more than one month.
Protect your eyes and face before
handling the battery.
All operations on the battery must be
carried out in a well ventilated area and
away from naked flames and sources
of sparks, so as to avoid the risk of
explosion or fire.
Do not try to charge a frozen battery;
the battery must first be thawed out to
avoid the risk of explosion. If the battery
has been frozen, before charging have
it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop who will check that
the internal components have not been
damaged and the casing is not cracked,
which could cause a leak of toxic and
corrosive acid.
Do not reverse the polarity and use only
a 12 V charger.
Do not disconnect the terminals while
the engine is running.
Do not charge the batteries without
disconnecting the terminals first.
Wash your hands afterwards.
Do not push the vehicle to start the
engine if you have an electronic or
automatic gearbox.
Some functions are not available if the
battery is not sufficiently charged.
10
Practical information
231
3008_en_Chap10_infos-pratiques_ed01-2015
Exiting economy mode
These functions are reactivated automatically
next time the vehicle is driven.
To restore the use of these functions
immediately, start the engine and let it run for at
least 5 minutes.
Load reduction mode
Energy economy mode
Switching to economy mode
Once this time has elapsed, a message
appears in the screen indicating that the
vehicle has switched to economy mode and the
active functions are put on standby.
Let the engine run for the duration
specified to ensure that the battery
charge is sufficient.
Do not repeatedly and continuously
restart the engine in order to charge the
battery.
A flat battery prevents the engine
from starting (refer to the "Battery"
paragraph).
If the telephone is being used at this
time, the call will be maintained for
5 minutes with the hands-free kit of your
PEUGEOT Connect Sound (RD5) or
PEUGEOT Connect Navigation (RNEG).
System which manages the duration of use of
certain functions to conserve a sufficient level
of charge in the battery.
After the engine has stopped, you can still use
functions such as the audio and telematics
system, windscreen wipers, dipped beam
headlamps, courtesy lamps, etc. for a
maximum combined duration of thirty minutes.
This period may be greatly reduced if the
battery is not fully charged.
System which manages the use of certain
functions according to the level of charge
remaining in the battery.
When the vehicle is being driven, the load
reduction function temporarily deactivates
certain functions, such as the air conditioning,
the heated rear screen...
The deactivated functions are reactivated
automatically as soon as conditions permit.
Practical information
232
3008_en_Chap10_infos-pratiques_ed01-2015
Changing a wiper blade
Removing
F Raise the corresponding wiper arm.
F Unclip the wiper blade and remove it.
Fitting
F Put the corresponding new wiper blade in
place and clip it.
F Fold down the wiper arm carefully.
Before removing a front
wiper blade
F Within one minute after switching off
the ignition, operate the wiper stalk to
position the wiper blades vertically on the
windscreen.
After fitting a front wiper
blade
F Switch on the ignition.
F Operate the wiper stalk again to park the
wiper blades.
Towing the vehicle
Access to the tools
The towing eye is installed in the boot under
the floor.
F Open the boot.
F Raise the floor.
F Secure it by hooking the cords on the
hooks on the load space cover.
F Remove the polystyrene box.
F Remove the towing eye from the carrier.
Procedure for having your vehicle towed or for
towing another vehicle using the removable
towing eye provided in the tool kit.
10
Practical information
233
3008_en_Chap10_infos-pratiques_ed01-2015
Towing your vehicle
F On the front bumper, unclip the top of the
cover using a small object such as a coin
or a screwdriver.
F Screw the towing eye in fully.
F Install the towing arm.
F Switch on the hazard warning lamps on the
towed vehicle.
F On the rear bumper, unclip the cover by
pressing at the bottom.
F Screw the towing eye in fully.
F Install the towing arm.
F Switch on the hazard warning lamps on the
towed vehicle.
Towing another vehicle
Put the gear lever into neutral
(position N for an electronic or
automatic gearbox).
Failure to follow this instruction could
lead to damage to certain components
(brakes, transmission, ...) and the
absence of braking assistance on
restarting the engine.
General
recommendations
Observe the legislation in force in your
country.
Ensure that the weight of the towing
vehicle is higher than that of the towed
vehicle.
The driver must remain at the wheel of
the towed vehicle and must have a valid
driving licence.
When towing a vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground, always use an approved
towing arm; rope and straps are prohibited.
The towing vehicle must move off gently.
When towing a vehicle with the engine off,
there is no longer any power assistance
for braking or steering.
In the following cases, you must always
call on a professional recovery service:
- vehicle broken down on a motorway
or fast road,
- four-wheel drive vehicle,
- when it is not possible to put the
gearbox into neutral, unlock the
steering, or release the parking
brake,
- towing with only two wheels on the
ground,
- where there is no approved towing
arm available...
Practical information
234
3008_en_Chap10_infos-pratiques_ed01-2015
Towbar with quickly detachable towball
Fitting
F Below the rear bumper, unclip and remove
the protective cover on the carrier.
F Before fitting the towball, check that the
points of contact, indicated by the arrows,
are clean.
Use a soft clean cloth.
F Ensure that the towball is fully engaged.
The two pins must be in contact with
the cut-outs in the carrier and the
trigger B must have returned to the
"locked" position.
F Install and clip in place the protective
cover, by rotating it to the left.
F On the towball, press and hold control A.
F Release the locking mechanism by
pressing the trigger B.
F Put the end of the towball into the carrier,
located below the bumper, as far as it will go.
No tools are required to install or remove the towball on this genuine towbar system.
F Connect the trailer plug to the 13-way
socket provided, located next to the carrier.
F Make the trailer safe by attaching its safety
cable to the eye provided for this purpose,
located on the carrier.
10
Practical information
235
3008_en_Chap10_infos-pratiques_ed01-2015
When the towball is installed, it may
interfere with the complete opening of
the lower tailgate.
Take care to avoid the tailgate coming
into contact with the towball.
F Unclip and remove the protective cover, by
turning it to the right.
Removing
F Press the trigger B and remove the towball
by pulling it towards you.
F On the towball, press and hold control A.
F Release the locking mechanism by
pressing the trigger B.
F Clip the protective cover in place on the
carrier located below the bumper.
If the towball is not locked in place, the
trailer could separate. There is a risk of
an accident.
Always lock the towball in the way
described.
Observe the legislation in force in the
country in which you are driving.
Remove the towball when it is not being
used.
Before setting off, check that the trailer
lighting and signalling works correctly.
Maximum authorised nose weight:
70 kg.
Refer to the "Technical data" section for
the maximum weights and towed loads
for your vehicle.
Carrying system (box or bicycle carrier).
You must not exceed the maximum
nose weight on the towbar: if this weight
is exceeded, the device could detach
from the vehicle and cause a serious
accident.
Practical information
236
3008_en_Chap10_infos-pratiques_ed01-2015
Towing a trailer
Your vehicle is primarily designed for
transporting people and luggage, but it may
also be used for towing a trailer.
Refer to the "Technical data" section for
details of the weights and towed loads
which apply to your vehicle.
We recommend the use of genuine
PEUGEOT towbars and their harnesses
that have been tested and approved
from the design stage of your vehicle,
and that the fitting of the towbar is
entrusted to a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
If the towbar is not fitted by a
PEUGEOT dealer, it must still be
fitted in accordance with the vehicle
manufacturer's instructions.
Driving with a trailer places greater
demands on the towing vehicle and the
driver must take particular care.
If the trailer starts to sway, you risk
losing control. The trailer could
overturn. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not try to correct the trailer's
movement by accelerating. Reduce
your speed and do not counter-steer.
Brake if necessary.
Driving advice
Distribution of loads
F Distribute the load in the trailer so that the
heaviest items are as close as possible to
the axle and the nose weight approaches the
maximum permitted without exceeding it.
Air density decreases with altitude,
thus reducing engine performance.
Above 1 000 metres, the maximum
towed load must be reduced by 10 % for
every 1 000 metres of altitude.
10
Practical information
237
3008_en_Chap10_infos-pratiques_ed01-2015
Side wind
F Take into account the increased sensitivity
to side wind.
Cooling
Towing a trailer on a slope increases the
temperature of the coolant.
As the fan is electrically controlled, its cooling
capacity is not dependent on the engine speed.
F To lower the engine speed, reduce your
speed.
The maximum towed load on a long incline
depends on the gradient and the ambient
temperature.
In all cases, keep a check on the coolant
temperature.
Braking
Towing a trailer increases the braking distance.
To avoid overheating of the brakes on a long
mountain type of descent, the use of engine
braking is recommended.
Tyres
F Check the tyre pressures of the towing
vehicle and of the trailer, observing the
recommended pressures.
Lighting
F Check the electrical lighting and signalling
on the trailer.
The rear parking sensors will be
deactivated automatically if a genuine
PEUGEOT towbar is used.
F If the warning lamp and the STOP
warning lamp come on, stop the
vehicle and switch off the engine
as soon as possible.
Practical information
238
3008_en_Chap10_infos-pratiques_ed01-2015
Fitting roof bars
When fitting transverse roof bars, use the four
quick-fit fixings provided for this purpose:
F lift the concealing flaps,
F open the fixing covers on each bar using
the key,
F put each fixing in place and lock them on
the roof one by one,
F ensure that roof bars are correctly fitted
(by shaking them),
F close the fixing covers on each bar using
the key.
Maximum authorised weight on the
roof bars, for a loading height not
exceeding 40 cm (with the exception of
bicycle carriers): 65 kg.
If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt the
speed of the vehicle to the profile of the
road to avoid damaging the roof bars
and the fixings on the roof.
Be sure to refer to national legislation in
order to comply with the regulations for
transporting objects that are longer than
the vehicle.
10
Practical information
239
3008_en_Chap10_infos-pratiques_ed01-2015
Very cold climate screen
F Offer up the screen, placing the lower clips
in contact with lower section of the lower
grille, using the centre guide as an aid.
F Clip first the lower part, then the upper
part, from the middle out towards the
edges.
Fitting
F Unclip the upper part of the screen, starting
at the edges.
F Take the screen by the lower edges and
detach it by pulling it towards you.
Removal
Removable protective screen which prevents the accumulation of snow at the radiator cooling fan.
Before fitting or removing the screen, ensure that the engine is off and the cooling fan has stopped. It is recommended that the screen be fitted and
removed by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Do not forget to remove the very cold
climate screen:
- when the ambient temperature
exceeds 10° C,
- when towing,
- at speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Practical information
240
3008_en_Chap10_infos-pratiques_ed01-2015
Accessories
"Comfort"
Door deflectors, parking sensors, side window
blinds, coat-hanger, insulated module...
"Transport solutions"
Roof bars, towbars, bicycle carrier on towbar,
bicycle carrier on roof bars, ski carrier, rigid
and flexible roof boxes...
Trailer towbar, which must be fitted by a
PEUGEOT dealer.
"Style"
Alloy wheels, door sill trims, chrome-plated
door handle shells, spoiler, gear lever knob...
"Safety and security"
Anti-theft alarm, window etching, wheel
security bolts, child seats and booster
cushions, first aid kit, breathalyzer, warning
triangle, high visibility vest, stolen vehicle
tracking system, dog guard, winter equipment
(snow chains, non-slip covers...)...
"Protection"
Mats*, boot liner, luggage net, style mud
flaps**, seat covers, pet range...
A wide range of accessories and genuine parts is available from the PEUGEOT dealer network.
These accessories and parts are all suitable for your vehicle and benefit from PEUGEOT's recommendation and warranty.
** The configuration of the vehicle requires
that it be fitted with mud flaps at the rear.
* To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals:
- ensure that the mat is positioned and
secured correctly,
- never fit one mat on top of another.
10
Practical information
241
3008_en_Chap10_infos-pratiques_ed01-2015
Depending on the legislation in force in
the country, certain safety equipment
may be compulsory: high visibility
safety vests, warning triangles,
breathalyzers, spare bulbs, spare fuses,
fire extinguisher, first aid kit, mud flaps
at the rear of the vehicle.
The fitting of electrical equipment
or accessories which are not
recommended by PEUGEOT may result
in a failure of your vehicle's electronic
system and excessive electrical
consumption.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer
for information on the range of
recommended equipment and
accessories.
You can also obtain cleaning and
maintenance products (exterior and
interior), products for topping up
(screenwash fluid...) and refills (sealant
cartridge for the temporary puncture
repair kit...) from PEUGEOT dealers.
Installation of radio
communication
transmitters
Before installing any after-market radio
communication transmitter, you can
contact a PEUGEOT dealer for the
specification of transmitters which can
be fitted (frequency, maximum power,
aerial position, specific installation
requirements), in line with the Vehicle
Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directive (2004/104/EC).
"Multimedia"
Portable satellite navigation systems, mapping
updates, Bluetooth hands-free system, DVD
player, USB Box, additional Bluetooth wireless
headphones, Bluetooth audio headphones
mains charger, multimedia support...
Technical data
242
3008_en_Chap11_caracteristiques_ed01-2015
Engine 1.2 litre PureTech 130 S&S 1.6 litre THP 163 1.6 litre THP 165 S&S
Gearbox
Manual
(6-speed)
Automatic
(6-speed)
Automatic
(6-speed)
Model code
HNYM/S
HNYM/1S
5FMA/1
5FMA/1D
5GZT/S
5GZT/1S
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 199 1 598 1 598
Bore x stroke (mm) 70 x 90.5 77 x 85.8 77 x 85.8
Max power: EU standard (kW)* 96 120 121
Max power engine speed (rpm) 5 500 6 000 6 000
Max torque: EU standard (Nm) 230 240 240
Max torque engine speed (rpm) 1 750 1 400 1 400
Fuel Unleaded petrol Unleaded petrol Unleaded petrol
Catalytic converter yes yes yes
Engine oil capacity (in litres)
(with filter replacement)
3.5 4.25 4.25
Petrol engines and gearboxes
* The maximum power corresponds to the type approved value on a test bed, under the conditions defined in European legislation
(directive 1999/99/CE).
11
Technical data
243
3008_en_Chap11_caracteristiques_ed01-2015
* The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg).
** The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an equal amount; warning,
towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
Petrol weights and towed loads (in kg)
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for
each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
Never exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) when towing (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient temperature is above 37 °C,
limit the towed load.
Engine 1.2 litre PureTech 130 S&S 1.6 litre THP 163 1.6 litre THP 165 S&S
Gearbox
Manual
(6-speed)
Automatic
(6-speed)
EAT6 automatic
(6-speed)
Model code
HNYM/S
HNYM/1S
5FMA/1
5FMA/1D
5GZT/S
5GZT/1S
- Unladen weight 1 400 1 480 1 450
- Kerb weight* 1 475 1 555 1 525
- Payload 550 550 550
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 1 950 2 030 2 000
- Gross train weight (GTW)
on a 12 % gradient
3 150 2 830 3 400
- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)
on a 10 % or 12 % gradient
1 200 800 1 400
- Braked trailer** (with load transfer within
the GTW limit)
1 500 800 1 500
- Unbraked trailer 735 750 750
- Recommended nose weight 70 70 70
Technical data
244
3008_en_Chap11_caracteristiques_ed01-2015
Petrol weights and towed loads (in kg) - commercial vehicles
* The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg).
** Exceeding the maximum rear axle weight involves a speed restriction of 50 mph (80 km/h) as defined in point 2.7 of the Directive.
*** Exceeding the gross vehicle weight when the vehicle is towing involves a speed restriction of 50 mph (80 km/h) as defined in point 2.7 of the
Directive.
**** Maximum braked trailer weight, within the GTW limit; warning, towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road
holding.
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for
each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient temperature is above 37 °C,
limit the towed load.
Engine 1.2 litre PureTech 130 S&S 1.6 litre THP 165 S&S
Gearbox
Manual
(6-speed)
EAT6 automatic
(6-speed)
Model code HNYM/1SCU 5GZT/1SCU
- Unladen weight 1 481 1 525
- Kerb weight* 1 556 1 600
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW)** 2 110 2 170
- Gross train weight (GTW)
on a 12 % gradient***
3 150 3 370
- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)
on a 10 % or 12 % gradient****
1 040 1 200
- Braked trailer (with load transfer within the
GTW limit)
- -
- Unbraked trailer 735 750
- Recommended nose weight 70 70
11
Technical data
245
3008_en_Chap11_caracteristiques_ed01-2015
Engine 1.6 litre e-HDi 115 1.6 litre BlueHDi 115 S&S 1.6 litre BlueHDi 120 S&S
Gearbox
ETG6 electronic
(6-speed)
Manual
(6-speed)
EAT6 automatic
(6-speed)
Manual
(6-speed)
EAT6 automatic
(6-speed)
Model code 9HD8/PS
BHXM/S
BHXM/1S
BHXT/1S
BHXT/2S
BHZM/S
BHZM/1S
BHZT/1S
BHZT/2S
Cubic capacity (cc) 1560 1 560 1 560
Bore x stroke (mm) 75 x 88.3 75 x 88.3 75 x 88.3
Max power: EU standard (kW)* 84 84 88
Max power engine speed (rpm) 3 600 3 500 3 500
Max torque: EU standard (Nm) 270 300 300
Max torque engine speed (rpm) 1 750 1 750 1 750
Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel
Catalytic converter yes yes yes
Particle filter yes yes yes
Engine oil capacity (in litres)
(with filter replacement)
3.75 - -
Diesel engines and gearboxes
* The maximum power corresponds to the type approved value on a test bed, under the conditions defined in European legislation
(directive 1999/99/CE).
Technical data
246
3008_en_Chap11_caracteristiques_ed01-2015
Diesel engines and gearboxes (continued)
* The maximum power corresponds to the type approved value on a test bed, under the conditions defined in European legislation
(directive 1999/99/CE).
Engine 2.0 litre BlueHDi 136 S&S 2.0 litre BlueHDi 150 S&S
Gearbox
Manual
(6-speed)
Manual
(6-speed)
Model code
AHSM/S
AHSM/1S
AHRM/S
AHRM/1S
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 997 1 997
Bore x stroke (mm) 85 x 88 85 x 88
Max power: EU standard (kW)* 100 110
Max power engine speed (rpm) 4 000 4 000
Max torque: EU standard (Nm) 370 370
Max torque engine speed (rpm) 2 000 2 000
Fuel Diesel Diesel
Catalytic converter yes yes
Particle filter yes yes
Engine oil capacity (in litres)
(with filter replacement)
- -
11
Technical data
247
3008_en_Chap11_caracteristiques_ed01-2015
* The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg).
** The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an equal amount; warning,
towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
Diesel weights and towed loads (in kg)
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for
each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
Never exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) when towing (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient temperature is above 37 °C,
limit the towed load.
Engine 1.6 litre e-HDi 115 1.6 litre BlueHDi 115 S&S
Gearbox
ETG6 electronic
(6-speed)
Manual
(6-speed)
EAT6 automatic
(6-speed)
Model code 9HD8/PS BHXM/S BHXM/1S
BHXT/1S
BHXT/2S
- Unladen weight 1 423 1 420 1 420 1 470
- Kerb weight* 1 498 1 495 1 495 1 545
- Payload 607 600 600 570
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 2 030 2 020 2 020 2 040
- Gross train weight (GTW)
on a 12 % gradient
3 130 3 120 2 910 3 140
- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)
on a 10 % or 12 % gradient
1 100 1 100 890 1 100
- Braked trailer** (with load transfer within the
GTW limit)
1 300 1 300 1 090 1 300
- Unbraked trailer 745 740 740 750
- Recommended nose weight 70 70 70 70
Technical data
248
3008_en_Chap11_caracteristiques_ed01-2015
Diesel weights and towed loads (in kg) (continued)
* The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg).
** The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an equal amount; warning,
towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for
each additional 1 000 metres of altitude..
Never exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) when towing (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient temperature is above 37 °C,
limit the towed load.
Engine 1.6 litre BlueHDi 120 S&S
2.0 litre BlueHDi
136 S&S
2.0 litre BlueHDi
150 S&S
Gearbox
Manual
(6-speed)
EAT6 automatic
(6-speed)
Manual
(6-speed)
Manual
(6-speed)
Model code BHZM/S BHZM/1S
BHZT/1S
BHZT/2S
AHSM/S
AHSM/1S
AHRM/S
AHRM/1S
- Unladen weight 1 420 1 420 1 470 1 530 1 530
- Kerb weight* 1 495 1 495 1 545 1 605 1 605
- Payload 600 600 570 550 550
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 2 020 2 020 2 040 2 080 2 080
- Gross train weight (GTW)
on a 12% gradient
3 120 2 910 3 140 3 480 3 480
- Braked trailer (within the GTW limit)
on a 10 % or 12 % gradient
1 100 890 1 100 1 400 1 400
- Braked trailer** (with load transfer within the
GTW limit)
1 300 1 090 1 300 1 500 1 500
- Unbraked trailer 740 740 750 750 750
- Recommended nose weight 70 70 70 70 70
11
Technical data
249
3008_en_Chap11_caracteristiques_ed01-2015
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for
each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient temperature is above 37 °C,
limit the towed load.
Diesel weights and towed loads (in kg) - commercial
vehicles
* The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg).
** Exceeding the maximum rear axle weight involves a speed restriction of 50 mph (80 km/h) as defined in point 2.7 of the Directive.
*** Exceeding the gross vehicle weight when the vehicle is towing involves a speed restriction of 50 mph (80 km/h) as defined in point 2.7 of the
Directive.
**** Maximum braked trailer weight, within the GTW limit; warning, towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road
holding.
Engine 1.6 litre BlueHDi 120 S&S
2.0 litre BlueHDi 150
S&S
Gearbox
Manual
(6-speed)
EAT6 automatic
(6-speed)
Manual
(6-speed)
Model code BHZM/SCU BHZM/1SCU
BHZT/1SCU
BHZT/2SCU
AHRM/SCU
AHRM/1SCU
- Unladen weight 1 519 1 519 1 560 1 611
- Kerb weight* 1 594 1 594 1 635 1 686
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW)** 2 140 2 140 2 180 2 240
- Gross train weight (GTW)
on a 12 % gradient***
3 140 2 940 3 080 3 440
- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)
on a 10 % or 12 % gradient****
1 000 800 900 1 200
- Braked trailer (with load transfer within the
GTW limit)
- - - -
- Unbraked trailer 745 740 750 750
- Recommended nose weight 70 70 70 70
Technical data
250
3008_en_Chap11_caracteristiques_ed01-2015
Dimensions (in mm)
11
Technical data
251
3008_en_Chap11_caracteristiques_ed01-2015
Identication markings
A.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) under the bonnet.
This number is engraved on the bodywork near the
damper support.
B.
Vehicle identification Number (VIN) on the
windscreen lower crossmember.
This number is indicated on a self-adhesive label which is
visible through the windscreen.
C. Manufacturer's label.
The VIN is indicated on a self-destroying
label affixed to the door aperture, on the
driver's side.
D. Tyre/paint label.
This label is fitted to the middle pillar, on
the driver's side.
It bears the following information:
- the tyre inflation pressures with and without
load,
- the tyre sizes,
- the inflation pressure of the spare wheel,
- the paint colour code.
Various visible markings for the identification and tracing of your vehicle.
Low tyre pressures increase fuel
consumption.
The tyre pressures must be checked
when the tyres are cold, at least once
a month.
Audio and Telematics
252
3008_en_Chap12a_BTA_ed01-2015
Emergency or assistance call
If an impact is detected by the airbag
control unit, and independently of
the deployment of any airbags, an
emergency call is made automatically.
PEUGEOT Connect SOS
In an emergency, press this
button for more than 2 seconds.
Flashing of the green LED and
a voice message confirm that
the call has been made to the
"PEUGEOT Connect SOS" call
centre*.
Pressing this button again immediately cancels
the request.
The green LED goes off.
Pressing this button for more than 8 seconds
cancels the request at any time.
The green LED remains on (without flashing)
when communication is established.
It goes off at the end of the call.
"PEUGEOT Connect SOS" immediately locates
your vehicle, starts communication with you in
your language**, and where necessary sends
the appropriate public emergency services**. In
countries where the service is not available, or
when the locating service has been expressly
declined, the call sent directly to the emergency
services (112) without the vehicle location.
**
Depending on the geographical cover of
"PEUGEOT Connect SOS", "PEUGEOT
Connect Assistance" and the official national
language selected by the owner of the vehicle.
The list of countries covered and PEUGEOT
CONNECT services is available from dealers
or at www.peugeot.co.uk.
* Subject to the general conditions for the
service available from dealers and to
technological and technical limitations.
If you benefit from the PEUGEOT Connect
Packs offer with the SOS and assistance
pack included, there are additional services
available to you in your MyPEUGEOT
personal space, via the PEUGEOT Internet
website in your country, accessible on
www.peugeot.co.uk.
.
Audio and Telematics
253
3008_en_Chap12a_BTA_ed01-2015
PEUGEOT Connect Assistance
If you purchased your vehicle outside
the PEUGEOT dealer network, we
invite you to have a dealer check the
configuration of these services and, if
desired, modified to suit your wishes.
In a multi-lingual country, configuration
is possible in the official national
language of your choice.
For technical reasons and in particular
to improve the quality of "PEUGEOT
CONNECT services" services to
customers, the manufacturer reserves
the right to carry out updates to the
vehicle's on-board telematic system.
A fault with the system does not
prevent the vehicle being driven.
Press this button for more than
2 seconds to request assistance
if the vehicle breaks down.
A voice message confirms that
the call has been made**.
Pressing this button again immediately cancels
the request.
The cancellation is confirmed by a voice
message.
The orange LED is on continuously: the backup
battery must be replaced.
In either case, the emergency and assistance
calls may not function.
Contact a qualified repairer as soon as
possible.
Operation of the system
When the ignition is switched
on, the green LED comes on for
3 seconds indicating that the
system is operating correctly.
If the orange LED flashes then
goes off: there is a system fault.
** Depending on the geographical cover of
"PEUGEOT Connect SOS", "PEUGEOT
Connect Assistance" and the official national
language selected by the owner of the vehicle.
The list of countries covered and PEUGEOT
CONNECT services is available from dealers
or at www.peugeot.co.uk.
255
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
The system is protected in such a way that it will only
operate in your vehicle.
PEUGEOT Connect Navigation (RT6)
01 First steps - Control panel
As a safety measure, the driver must only carry out
operations which require prolonged attention while the
vehicle is stationary.
When the engine is switched off and to prevent
discharging of the battery, the system switches off
following the activation of the energy economy mode.
CONTENTS
02 Steering mounted controls
03 General operation
04 Navigation - Guidance
05 Traffic information
06 Using the telephone
07 Radio
08 Music media players
09 Audio settings
10 Configuration
11 Screen menu maps
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
256
258
259
261
274
277
287
292
298
299
300
GPS navigation system
Multimedia audio system
Bluetooth
®
telephone
Frequently asked questions p.
304
01
256
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
Select:
- the next lower / higher radio
frequency automatically.
- the previous / next CD track,
MP3 track or media.
- the left / right of the screen when a
menu is displayed.
Move left / right in "Move the map" mode.
Abandon the current
operation, up one level
in the menu.
Long press: return to
the permanent display.
Open the
"Conguration" menu.
Long press: access
to the GPS coverage
and the navigation
demonstration mode.
Open the "Trafc
information" menu
and display the current
trafc alerts.
Select:
- the previous/next line in a list or menu.
- the previous / next media folder.
- step by step selection of the previous/
next radio frequency.
- the previous / next MP3 folder.
Move up/down, in "Move the map" mode.
FIRST STEPS
Access to the
"Navigation - guidance"
menu and display the
recent destinations.
Short press without the
engine running: on / off.
Short press with the engine
running: audio source off /
restore.
MODE button: Selection
of the type of permanent
display.
Long press: black screen
(DARK).
Selection and conrmation OK knob:
Selection of an item on the screen or in a list or a menu,
then conrmation with a short press.
Other than for menus and lists, a short press displays a
contextual menu depending on the current screen.
Rotation with map displayed: zoom the map scale in
and out.
Volume adjustment (each
source is independent,
including TA messages and
navigation instructions).
01
257
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
Continuous press:
reinitialisation of the system.
Open the "Telephone" menu
and display the list of recent
calls or accept an incoming call.
FIRST STEPS
Short press: select pre-set radio station.
Long press: pre-set the current station.
Access to the "MUSIC" menu, and display of the CD/MP3/
Apple
®
tracks and folders.
Long press: display the audio settings screen for the
"MEDIA" (CD/USB/iPod/Streaming/AUX) sources.
Access to the "RADIO" menu and
display the list of stations received.
Long press: display the audio settings
screen for the radio tuner source.
02
258
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
RADIO: select the previous/next preset
station.
Select the next entry in the address book.
SRC/TEL button:
change the audio source,
start a call from the address book,
call/end call on the telephone,
press for more than 2 seconds: access
to the address book.
RADIO: change to the previous radio
station in the list.
Long press: automatic search for a
lower frequency.
CD: select the previous track.
CD: continuous press: fast reverse.
RADIO: change to the next radio station in the list.
Long press: automatic search for a higher frequency.
CD: select the next track.
CD: continuous press: fast forward play.
Volume increase.
Volume decrease.
Mute: press the volume
increase and decrease
buttons simultaneously.
Restore the sound by
pressing one of the
two volume buttons.
STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS
03
259
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
For the details of the menus, refer to the "Screen menu map"
section.
For cleaning the screen, the use of a soft, non-abrasive cloth
(spectacles cloth) is recommended, with no additional product.
"RADIO"
"TELEPHONE"
(If conversation in progress)
SETUP: PARAMETERS
date and time, display conguration, sound,
vehicle settings.
Changing the audio source:
RADIO: RADIO broadcasts.
MUSIC: playing MUSIC.
Press the MODE button several times in succession for access to the following displays:
"FULL SCREEN MAP"
"MAP IN WINDOW"
(If navigation guidance in
progress)
GENERAL OPERATION
03
260
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
A press on the knob gives access
to short-cut menus according to the
display in the screen.
Display according to context
RADIO:
Change waveband
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS,
CD or USB (according to
media):
Play modes:
Normal
Random
Random on all media
Repetition
TELEPHONE
(call in progress):
Private mode
FULL SCREEN MAP OR IN
A NEW WINDOW:
Stop / Restore guidance
Select destination
Enter an address
Directory
GPS coordinates
Divert route
Move the map
Info. on location
Select as destination
Select as stage
Save this place (contacts)
Quit map mode
Guidance criteria
Put call on hold
DTMF ring tones
Hang up
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
FM
Trafc anouncements (TA)
DAB
Information
AM
Entertainment
Special or Urgent
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Service announcements
1
GENERAL OPERATION
04
261
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
List of recent destinations.
"Navigation - guidance"
To delete the list of recent destinations, select "Guidance
options" in the navigation menu then select "Delete last
destinations" and conrm. Select "Yes" then conrm.
Deleting just one destination is not possible.
Go from the list to the menu (left/right).
"Select destination"
"Journey leg and route"
"Guidance options"
"Map management"
"Stop / Restore guidance"
Press NAV.
or
To make full use of all of the
functions of your navigation
system, update the mapping
regularly. Contact a
PEUGEOT dealer or order
your mapping update at
http://peugeot.navigation.com
A short press on the end of the
lighting control stalk repeats
the last navigation message.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Access to the "NAVIGATION" menu
04
262
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
Press NAV to display the
"Navigation - guidance" menu.
Towards a new destination
Selecting a destination
Select "Select destination" and
conrm, then select "Enter an address"
and conrm.
Select the "Country" function then
conrm.
Select the "Town" or "Post code"
function then conrm.
Select the letters in the name of the
town or the characters in a post code
one at a time, conrming each one with
the knob.
Selection the town from the list offered,
then conrm.
A pre-set list (by entering the rst few
letters) of the towns in the country selected
can be accessed directly by selecting and
conrming "List" in the screen.
If possible, enter the "Road" and "N°/X"
information in the same way.
Select "Archive" to save the address entered in a contact le.
After about 60 seconds with no address entered, the system returns
to the last home page; to return to the current input, start again with
steps 1 and 2 then press again to nd the current input.
Conrm "OK" to start guidance.
Select the guidance criteria: "Fastest
route", "Shortest route" or optimised
"Distance/Time", then select the
desired restriction criteria: "With tolls",
"With Ferry", or "Trafc info" then
conrm "OK".
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
04
263
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
Towards a recent destination
Press NAV to display the
"Navigation - guidance" menu.
Select the desired destination and
conrm to start guidance.
Towards a contact in the contacts directory
Select "Select destination" and
conrm, then select "Directory" and
conrm.
Selection the desired destination from
your contacts and conrm "OK" to start
the guidance.
Press NAV to display the
"Navigation - guidance" menu.
Navigation towards a contact is only possible if it has an address
entered in the audio navigation system.
Delete recent destinations
Press NAV to display the
"Navigation - guidance" menu.
Select "Options" and conrm and then
"Delete recent destinations" and
conrm.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
04
264
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
Select "Select destination" and
conrm, then select "GPS coordinates"
and conrm.
Enter the GPS coordinates and
conrm "OK" to start the guidance.
Press NAV to display the
"Navigation - guidance" menu.
Towards GPS coordinates Towards a point on the map
With the map displayed, press OK to
display the contextual menu. Select
"Move the map" and conrm.
Press OK to display the contextual
menu for "Move the map" mode.
Select "Select as destination" or
"Select as stage" and conrm.
Move the cursor using the control to
identify the desired destination.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
04
265
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
Towards points of interest (POI)
The points of interest (POI) indicate all of the service locations in the vicinity
(hotels, various businesses, airports...).
Select the "Enter an address" function
and conrm, then select Select
destination and conrm.
To select a POI close to your current
location, select "POI" and conrm, then
select "Around the current place" and
conrm.
To select a POI as a stage on the route,
select "POI" and conrm, then select "On
the route" and conrm.
To select a POI as a destination, rst
enter the country and town (refer to the
"Towards a new destination" section),
select "POI" and conrm, nally select
"Near" and conrm.
Search for POIs in the categories
suggested in the following pages.
Select "Search by Name" to search for POIs by name and not by
proximity.
Select the POI and conrm "OK" to start
the guidance.
Press NAV to display the
"Navigation - guidance" menu.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
04
266
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
This icon appears when several POIs are grouped
together in the same area. Zooming in on this icon
shows details of the POIs.
Service station
Garage
PEUGEOT
Covered car park
Car park
Rest area
Hotel
Restaurant
Cafeteria
Bed and breakfast
Railway station
Bus station
Port
Industrial estate
Supermarket
Vending machine
Sports complex, sports centre,
sports ground
Swimming pool
Winter sports resort
Airport
Theme parks
Hospital, Chemist,
Vet
Police station
Town hall
Post ofce
Museum, Culture, Theatre,
Historic monument
Tourist information, Tourist
attraction
Risk areas / Danger
areas*
List of principal points of interest (POI)
*
According to availability in the country.
School
An annual mapping update allows new points of interest to be presented to you.
You can also update the Risk areas / Danger areas every month.
The detailed procedure is available on:
http://peugeot.navigation.com.
Cinema
04
267
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Select:
- "Visual alert"
- "Audible alert"
- "Alert only in guidance"
- "Overspeed alarm only".
The choice of time of notication denes
how long in advance that Risk area
warnings are given.
Select "OK" to conrm the screen.
Select "Guidance options" and conrm,
then select "Set parameters for risk
areas" and conrm.
These functions are only available if risk areas have been
downloaded and installed on the system.
The detailed procedure for updating risk area POIs can be found at
http://peugeot.navigation.com.
Press NAV to display the "Navigation -
guidance" menu.
Settings for risk area / danger area alerts
04
268
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
Adding a stage
Press NAV to display the
"Navigation - guidance" menu.
Select "Journey leg and route" then
conrm.
Select "Close to" a route passing
close to the stage or "Strict" for a route
passing through the stage.
Conrm "OK" to start the guidance, and
give a general indication of the guidance
route.
Select "Add a stage" then conrm.
The address of the stage is entered as
a destination, by "Enter an address",
a contact in "Directory", or "Previous
destinations".
Organising stages
To organise stages, carry out
operations 1 to 2 again, then select
"Order/delete journey legs" and
conrm.
Select and conrm to save
the modications.
Select the stage that you want to move
in the order.
Select "Delete" to delete the stage.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
04
269
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
Route options
Calculation criteria
Select "Guidance options" and conrm.
Select "OK" and conrm to save
the modications.
Select "Dene calculation criteria" and
conrm.
This function allows modication of:
- the guidance criteria: ("Fastest
route", "Shortest route",
"Distance/Time"),
- the exclusion criteria: ("With tolls"
or "With Ferry"),
- trafc avoidance: ("Trafc info").
Press NAV to display the
"Navigation - guidance" menu.
If trafc avoidance (Trafc info) is selected, the system suggests
an alternative route if there is a delay on the guidance route.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
04
270
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
Press NAV to display the
"Navigation - guidance" menu.
Map management
Selecting the points of interest displayed on the map
Select "Map management" and conrm.
Select from the various categories the
ones that you want to display on the
screen.
Select "Map details" and conrm.
Select "Default" to have only "Filling stations, garages" and
"Risk areas" appear on the map (if installed in the system).
Select "OK" then conrm and
select "OK" again then conrm to save
the modications.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
04
271
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
Select "Map management" and conrm.
Select:
- "Vehicle direction" to have the map
follow the direction of travel,
- "North direction" to keep the map
always North up,
- "Perspective view" to display a
perspective view.
Select "Map orientation" and conrm.
The colour of the map, different from the day and night mode, is
congured in the "SETUP" menu.
Map orientation
Press NAV to display the
"Navigation - guidance" menu.
Street names are visible on the map from the 100 m scale.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
04
272
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
Press NAV to display the
"Navigation - guidance" menu.
Navigation voice synthesis
Select "Guidance options" and conrm.
Adjusting the volume / Deactivation
Select "Set speech synthesis" and
conrm.
Select the volume graph and conrm.
Select "Deactivate" to deactivate voice messages.
Select "OK" and press the dial
to conrm.
Adjust the volume to the desired level
and conrm.
The volume of messages can be adjusted during the transmission
of the message using the volume adjustment control.
The volume setting of guidance messages is also accessible via
the "SETUP" / "Voice synthesis" menu.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
04
273
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
Male voice / Female voice
Press SETUP to display the
conguration menu.
Select "Select male voice" or "Select
female voice" then conrm "Yes" to
activate a male or female voice. The
system restarts.
Select "Voice synthesis" and conrm.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
05
274
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
Access to the "TRAFFIC INFORMATION" menu
List of TMC messages in order
of distance from the vehicle.
Go from the list to the menu (left/right).
"Trafc information"
"Geographic lter"
"Select TMC station"
(automatic, manual)
"Display/Do not display
messages"
or
Press "TRAFFIC".
TRAFFIC INFORMATION
05
275
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
Configure the filtering and display of TMC messages
TMC (Trafc Message Channel) messages with GPS Navigation provide trafc information in real time.
Press the TRAFFIC button to display the
"Trafc information" menu.
Select the "Geographic lter" function
and conrm.
The system offers a choice of:
- "Retain all the messages",
or
- "Retain the messages"
● "Around the vehicle", (conrm
the mileage to modify and select
the distance),
● "On the route".
Conrm "OK" to save the modications.
We recommend:
- a lter on the route and
- a lter around the vehicle of:
- 12 miles (20 km) in urban areas,
- 30 miles (50 km) on motorways.
TRAFFIC INFORMATION
05
276
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
Principal TMC symbols
Red and yellow triangle: trafc information, for example:
Black and blue triangle: general information, for example:
Weather reports
Modied signage
Risk of explosion
Trafc reports
Narrow carriageway
Road closed
Wind
Slippery surface
Demonstration
Fog
Accident
Danger
Parking
Delay
No entry
Snow / ice
Roadworks
Trafc jam
Receiving TA messages
The TA (Trafc Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert
messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a
radio station transmitting this type of message. When a trafc report
is transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, USB, ...) is
interrupted automatically to play the TA message. Normal playback
of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of
the message.
Press RADIO to display the menu.
Select "Service announcements" then
conrm.
Activate or deactivate "TA" then conrm.
The volume setting for TA messages can be adjusted only during the
transmission of this type of alert.
Activate or deactivate the function at any time by pressing
the button.
During a message, press the button to interrupt it.
TRAFFIC INFORMATION
06
277
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
Access to the "TELEPHONE" menu
"Telephone"
"Dial"
"Directory of contacts"
"ontacts management"
"Phone functions"
"Bluetooth functions"
"Hang up"
Go from the list to the menu (left/right).
or
List of recent calls sent and
received with the telephone
connected to the system.
Press this button.
To make a call, select a number in the list and conrm "OK"
to start the call.
Connecting a different telephone deletes the list of
recent calls.
No telephone connected.
Telephone connected.
Incoming call.
Outgoing call.
Synchronisation of
contacts in progress.
Telephone call in
progress.
In the top bar of the permanent
display
USING THE TELEPHONE
06
278
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
USING THE TELEPHONE
Pairing a Bluetooth
®
telephone
First connection
For reasons of safety and because they require prolonged attention
on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing the Bluetooth
mobile telephone to the hands-free system of the audio unit must be
carried out with the vehicle stationary.
In the Bluetooth menu of your telephone, select the
name "PEUGEOT" from the list of devices detected.
Press this button.
Select "Bluetooth functions" and
conrm.
Select "Peripherals search" and
conrm.
The list of peripheral devices detected
is displayed. Wait until the "Connect"
button is available.
You can check the compatibility of your telephone at
www.peugeot.co.uk (services).
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function
and ensure that it is "visible to all" (telephone
conguration).
Quick procedure from the telephone
Enter a minimum 4 gure code in the telephone and
conrm.
Enter the same code in the system,
select "OK" and conrm.
Procedure from the system
06
279
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
USING THE TELEPHONE
Select "Connect" and conrm.
The system offers to connect the
telephone:
- in "Hands-free mode" (telephone
only),
- in "Audio" mode (streaming: playing
music les on the telephone),
- or "All" (for selection of both
modes).
Select "OK" and conrm.
Then accept automatic connection on the telephone to allow the
telephone to reconnect automatically every time the vehicle is
started.
The ability of the system to connect in only one mode depends on
the telephone. The two modes may both connect by default.
The "Hands-free mode" should be used in preference if
"Streaming" is not desired.
The services available depend on the network, the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth telephone used. Check the telephone
manual and with your network provider for details of the services available to you.
Depending on the type of telephone, the system will ask you to
accept or not the transfer of your contacts.
On return to the vehicle, the last telephone connected
automatically reconnects, within around 30 seconds after
switching on the ignition (Bluetooth activated and visible).
To modify the automatic connection mode, remove the pairing
and pair the telephone again with the desired mode.
Enter a minimum 4 gure code in the telephone
and conrm.
Enter the same code in the system,
select "OK" and conrm.
Select the name of the desired
peripheral from the list of devices
detected then conrm.
06
280
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
USING THE TELEPHONE
Directory configuration / Synchronisation with the telephone
Press PHONE then select "Contacts
management" and conrm.
Select "New contact" to enter a new
contact.
Select "Sort by Name/First name" or
"Sort by First name/Name" to choose
the order in which they appear.
Select "Delete all contacts" to delete
the contacts saved in the system.
Select "Synchronization options":
- No synchronization: only the
contacts saved in the system
(always present).
- Display telephone contacts: only the
contacts saved in the telephone.
- Display SIM card contacts: only the
contacts saved on the SIM card.
- Display all phone contacts:
contacts on the SIM card and in the
telephone.
Select "Import all the entries" to import
all the contacts in the telephone and
save them in the system.
Once imported, a contact remains visible
whatever telephone is connected.
Select "Contact mem. status" to see the
number of contacts saved in the system
or imported, and the free memory.
06
281
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
Editing, importing or deleting a contact
Press PHONE then select "Directory of
contacts" and conrm.
Select "Search", then turn the knob to
choose in numerical or alphabetical order
a group of contacts from the entries made
previously, then conrm.
Go to the list of contacts, select the
desired contact then conrm.
Select "Open" to view a contact on the
telephone or modify a contact saved in
the system.
Select "Import" to copy a contact from
the telephone to the system.
Select "Delete" to delete a contact
recorded in the system.
USING THE TELEPHONE
Select OK or press the back button to exit
this menu.
Once the contact has been imported, the Bluetooth symbol
disappears, replaced by the telephone symbol which shows that the
contact has been saved in the system.
It is not possible to modify or delete contacts in the telephone or the
SIM card via the Bluetooth connection.
In the "Directory of contacts" menu, the import and deletion of
contacts is done one by one.
06
282
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
USING THE TELEPHONE
Press PHONE twice.
Select "Dial" then conrm.
Select "Directory of contacts" then
conrm.
Dial the telephone number using the
virtual keypad selecting each number
in turn.
Conrm "OK" to make the call.
Press TEL or twice on PHONE.
Calling a new number
Calling a contact
Select the desired contact and conrm.
If access was via the PHONE button,
select "Call" and conrm.
Select the number and conrm to start
the call.
Making a call
Use of the telephone is not recommended while driving. We
recommended that you park safely or make use of the steering
mounted controls.
06
283
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
USING THE TELEPHONE
Calling a recently entered number
Press TEL, select "Call list" and
conrm,
Select the desired number and conrm.
To erase the calls log, press PHONE twice, select "Phone
functions" and conrm then select "Delete calls log" and conrm.
Ending a call
Press PHONE then select "OK" to end
the call.
Or make a long press on TEL at the
steering mounted controls.
Or make two short presses on TEL at
the steering mounted controls.
Or press the MODE button, as many
times as necessary, until the telephone
screen is displayed.
Press PHONE to display the calls log.
or
Press "OK" to display the contextual
menu then select "Hang up" and
conrm.
It is always possible to start a call directly from the telephone; park
the vehicle as a safety measure.
06
284
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
USING THE TELEPHONE
Receiving a call
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed display
on the screen.
"Yes" to accept the call is selected by
default.
Press "OK" to accept the call.
Select "No" and conrm to reject the
call.
A short press on TEL accepts an
incoming call.
A long press on TEL rejects an incoming
call.
06
285
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
Options during a call*
During a call, press the MODE button
several times to select display of the
telephone screen, then press "OK" to
open the contextual menu.
Select "Private mode" and conrm to
take the call on the handset.
Or select "Hands-free mode" and
conrm to take the call via the vehicle's
speakers.
Select "Put call on hold" and conrm to
put the current call on hold.
Or select "Resume the call" and
conrm to resume the call on hold.
Select "DTMF ring tones" to use the
numerical keypad, so as to navigate
through the menu of an interactive vocal
server.
Select "Hang up" to end the call.
* Depending on the compatibility of the phone and your service plan.
it is possible to hold a 3-way conference
call by making 2 calls in succession*.
Select "Conference mode call" in
the contextual menu accessible using
this button.
Or make a short press on this button.
USING THE TELEPHONE
07
287
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
"FM / DAB / AM"
"Change waveband"
("FM / DAB / AM")
"Options" ("TA, RDS, DAB/FM
station tracking")
"Audio settings" (see this
section)
"Update radio list"
Alphabetical list of stations
received.
Press 5 or 6 or use the rotary control to select the
previous or next station in the list.
Go from the list to the menu (left/right).
or
Press RADIO.
RADIO
Access to the "RADIO" menu
07
289
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
Press the button on the numerical keypad to recall a
preset station.
Or press then turn the thumb wheel at the steering
mounted controls.
Presetting a station
After selecting a station, press one of the buttons on the
numerical keypad for 2 seconds to preset the current
station.
An audible signal conrms that the station has been preset.
Press RADIO.
Activate / Deactivate RDS
RDS, if activated, allows you to continue listening to the same
station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However,
in certain conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be
assured throughout the entire country as radio stations do not
cover 100 % of the territory. This explains the loss of reception of
the station during a journey.
Select "Guidance options" then
conrm.
Activate or deactivate "RDS" then
conrm.
RADIO
07
290
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
RADIO
Display of options:
if active but not available, the display
will be greyed out,
if active and available, the display will
be empty.
Display the name and number of
the multiplex service being used.
Preset stations, buttons 1 to 6
Short press: select the preset radio
station.
Long press: preset a radio station.
Display of "Radiotext" for the
current station.
Display of the "DAB" or "DAB
(FM)" band.
Display of the name of
the current station.
Represents the signal strength
for the band being listened to.
If the "DAB" radio station being
listened to is not available on
"FM", the "DAB FM" option is
greyed out.
Any thumbnail broadcast by the
station.
The "Video mode" allows the
display to be enlarged.
07
291
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
RADIO
Press "RADIO".
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting)
Digital radio
Digital radio provides a higher quality reception and also the
graphical display of information for the radio station, by selecting
"Video mode" in "Radio favourites" (Options).
The different radio multiplex services offer a choice of stations
displayed in alphabetical order.
Select "Change band" and conrm.
Selection "DAB" and conrm.
Digital radio - DAB/FM auto tracking
"DAB" does not have 100% coverage of the country.
When the digital signal is weak, "DAB / FM auto tracking" allows you
to continue listening to the same station, by automatically switching
to the corresponding analogue "FM" station (if one exists).
Change of station in the same "multiplex".
Manual search for a "multiplex".
Press "RADIO".
Select "Options" and conrm.
Select "FM/DAB" and conrm.
If "DAB / FM auto tracking" is on, there will be a difference of a few
seconds in the programme when the system changes to analogue
"FM" radio with sometimes a variation in volume.
Display of the "DAB" band then becomes "DAB (FM)".
When the strength of the digital signal is good again, the system
automatically switches back to "DAB".
If the "DAB" station you are listening to is not available on "FM"
("DAB/FM" option greyed out), or if "DAB / FM auto tracking" is not
on, the sound will be cut when the digital signal is too weak.
08
292
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
"MEDIA"
"Change media"
"Eject USB device" (if USB
connected)
"Play mode" ("Normal",
"Random", "Random on all
media", "Repetition")
"Audio settings"
"Activate / Deactivate AUX input"
List of the current media
tracks.
Go from the list to the menu (left/right).
or
Press MUSIC.
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
Access to the "Music media player" menu
08
293
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
CD, MP3 CD / USB player
The audio equipment will only play audio les with ".wma, .aac, .ac,
.ogg and .mp3" le extensions and with a bit rate of between 32 Kbps
and 320 Kbps.
It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.
No other type of le (.mp4, .m3u...) can be played.
WMA les must be of the standard wma 9 type.
The sampling rates supported are greater than 32 KHz.
It is advisable to restrict le names to 20 characters, without using of
special characters (e.g.: " " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing and displaying
problems.
In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when recording
it is preferable to select the ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or Joliet standard.
If the disc is recorded in another format (udf, ...), it may not be played
correctly.
It is recommended that the same recording standard is always used
for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum)
for optimum sound quality.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard is
recommended.
Information and advice
The system supports USB mass storage or iPod
devices via the USB port (suitable cable not supplied).
If a partitioned USB memory key is connected to the
system, only the rst partition is recognised.
Control of the peripheral device is with the audio
system controls.
The number of tracks is limited to 2000 maximum,
999 tracks per folder.
If the current consumption at the USB port exceeds
500 mA, the system goes into protection mode and
deactivates the port.
Other peripherals, not recognised on connection, must
be connected to the auxiliary socket using a Jack cable
(not supplied).
Use only USB memory sticks formatted FAT32 (File Allocation Table).
The system does not support the operation of an Apple
®
player and a
USB memory stick connected at the same time.
It is recommended that ofcial Apple
®
USB cables are used to ensure
correct operation.
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
08
294
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
Insert the CD in the player, insert the USB
memory stick in the USB player or connect the
USB peripheral to the USB port using a suitable
cable (not supplied).
The system builds playlists (in temporary
memory), an operation which can take from
a few seconds to several minutes at the rst
connection.
Reduce the number of non-music les and the
number of folders to reduce the waiting time.
The playlists are updated every time the ignition
is switched off or connection of a USB memory
stick. However, the system memorises these
lists and if they are not modied, the loading
time will be shorter.
Play starts automatically after a period which
depends on the capacity of the USB memory
stick.
Selection of source
The SOURCE button on the steering mounted controls allows a
direct change to the next media source.
"CD / CD MP3"
"USB, iPod"
"AUX"
"STREAMING"
"RADIO"
Press MUSIC to display the "MEDIA"
menu.
Select "Following media source" and
conrm.
Repeat the operation as many times as necessary to obtain the
desired media source (except for radio which is accessible either
with SOURCE or RADIO).
Sources
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
08
/
/
/ /
/ /
/
+ /
/
/
295
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
Selecting a track
Previous track.
Next track.
Previous folder.
Next folder.
Fast forward.
Fast backward.
Pause: long press on SRC.
MUSIC: List of USB or CD tracks or
folders
Up or down in the list.
Conrm, next menu level.
Up one menu level.
Long press
Long press
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
08
296
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
Audio streaming
Streaming allows audio les on your telephone to be played via the
vehicle's speakers.
Connect the telephone: refer to the "USING THE TELEPHONE"
section.
Select "Audio" or "All" prole.
If play does not start automatically, it may be necessary to start the
audio playback from the telephone.
Control is from the peripheral device or by using the audio system
buttons.
Once connected in streaming mode, the telephone is considered to be
a media source.
It is recommended that you activate "Repeat" on the Bluetooth
peripheral.
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
Connecting APPLE
®
players
Connect the Apple
®
player to the USB port using a suitable cable
(not supplied).
Play starts automatically.
Control is via the audio system.
The classications available are those of the portable device
connected (artists / albums / genres / playlists / audiobooks /
podcasts).
The default classication used is by artist. To modify the classication
used, return to the rst level of the menu then select the desired
classication (playlists for example) and conrm to go down through
the menu to the desired track.
The "Shufe tracks" mode on an iPod
®
corresponds to the "Random"
mode on the audio system.
The "Shufe albums" mode on an iPod
®
corresponds to the "Random
all" on the audio system.
"Shufe tracks" is restored by default on each connection.
The version of software in the audio system may not be compatible
with the generation of your Apple
®
player.
08
297
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
Using the auxiliary input (AUX)
JACK/USB audio cable not supplied
Connect the portable device
(MP3, WMA player…) to the
JACK auxiliary audio socket or
USB port using a suitable cable.
Press MUSIC to display the "MUSIC"
menu.
Select "Activate / Deactivate AUX
input" and conrm.
First adjust the volume of your portable
device (to a high level). Then adjust the
volume of your audio system.
Display and management of the controls are via the portable device.
09
298
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
AUDIO SETTINGS
They are accessible by the MUSIC
button in the control panel or by a long
press on RADIO according to the source
in use.
- "Equalizer" (choice of 6 musical ambiences)
- "Bass"
- "Treble"
- "Loudness" (Activate/Deactivate)
- "Distribution" ("Driver", "All passengers")
- "Le-Ri balance" (Left/Right)
- "Fr-Re balance" (Front/Rear)
- "Auto. Volume" depending on road speed (Activate/Deactivate)
The audio settings (Equalizer, Bass, Treble and Loudness) are
different and independent for each sound source.
The settings for distribution and balance are common to all sources.
The distribution (or spatialisation using the Arkamys
©
system) of sound
is an audio process that allows the audio quality to be adapted to the
number of listeners in the vehicle.
On-board audio: Arkamys
©
Sound Staging optimises sound distribution
in the the passenger compartment.
10
299
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
CONFIGURATION
Press SETUP to display the
"Conguration" menu.
Select "Choose colour" and conrm to
select the screen colour harmony and
the map presentation mode:
- day mode,
- night mode,
- automatic day/night mode,
according to whether the
headlamps are on.
Select "Adjust luminosity" and conrm
to adjust the screen brightness.
Press "OK" to save the changes.
The settings for day and night are
independent.
Select "Display conguration" and
conrm.
Display configuration
11
300
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
SCREEN MENU MAP(S)
"Navigation - guidance"
MENU
Enter an address
Select destination
Directory
GPS coordinates
Journey leg and route
Add a stage
Enter an address
Directory
Previous destinations
Order/delete journey legs
Divert route
Chosen destination
Guidance options
Dene calculation criteria
Delete last destinations
Map management
Map orientation
MAIN FUNCTION
Option A1
Option A11
Option A
Option B...
Map details
Move the map
Mapping and updating
Description of risk areas database
Stop / Restore guidance
1
2
3
1
3
3
2
2
2
2
1
3
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
Set parameters for risk areas
2
Fastest route
2
Shortest route
Distance/Time
With tolls
2
2
2
With Ferry
2
Trafc info
2
Set speech synthesis
Fastest route
Shortest route
3
3
2
Distance/Time
With tolls
3
3
With Ferry
Trafc info
3
3
3
3
3
North direction
Vehicle direction
Perspective view
11
301
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
Select TMC station
Automatic TMC
Manual TMC
List of TMC stations
Display / Do not display
messages
"TRAFFIC INFORMATION"
MENU
Geographic filter
Retain all the messages
Retain the messages
Around the vehicle
On the route
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
3
3
1
SCREEN MENU MAP(S)
Dial
Directory of contacts
Call
Open
Import
"TELEPHONE" MENU
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
3
3
3
2
2
2
1
1
1
3
3
3
2
3
2
2
3
List of the paired peripherals
Connect
Disconnect
Delete
Delete all
Phone functions
Ring options
Contact mem. status
Delete calls log
Bluetooth functions
Peripherals search
Rename radiotelephone
Hang up
Display all phone contacts
Delete
Search
Contacts management
New contact
Delete all contacts
Import all the entries
Synchronization options
Display telephone contacts
No synchronization
Display SIM card contacts
2
Cancel
2
Sort by First name/Name
3
Cancel
11
302
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
SCREEN MENU MAP(S)
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
2
2
2
1
Random on all media
Repetition
Audio settings
Activate / Deactivate AUX
input
"MUSIC" MENU
Change Media
Read mode
Normal
Random
All passengers
Le-Ri balance
Fr-Re balance
Auto. Volume
Update radio list
Bass
Treble
Loudness
Distribution
Driver
1
2
2
1
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
Equalizer
"RADIO" MENU
Change Waveband
Options
RDS station tracking
FM/DAB
Audio settings
None
Classical
Jazz
Rock
Techno
Vocal
2
2
2
2
USB/iPod
AUX
CD
Bluetooth streaming
2
2
2
FM
DAB
AM
3
Activated / Deactivated
3
Activated / Deactivated
11
303
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
2
3
3
1
4
2
2
1
4
4
2
2
Night mode
Auto Day/Night
Adjust luminosity
Set date and time
"SETUP" MENU
Display configuration
Choose colour
Harmony
Cartography
Day mode
Speech synthesis setting
Guidance instructions volume
Select male voice/Select female voice
2
Select units
1
Define vehicle parameters*
* The settings vary according to the vehicle.
2
Alert log
1
Trip computer
2
Status of functions
2
Français
1
Select language
2
English
2
Italiano
2
Portuguese
2
Español
2
Deutsch
2
Nederlands
2
2
Turkçe
Cestina
2
2
Polski
Hrvatski
2
2
Русский
Hungarian
SCREEN MENU MAP(S)
304
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
The following table groups together the answers to the most frequently asked questions concerning your audio system.
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
The route calculation is
not successful.
The guidance criteria may conict with the current location (exclusion of
toll roads on a toll motorway).
Check the guidance criteria on the Navigation
Menu, "Guidance options"\ "Dene calculation
criteria".
I am unable to enter my
post code.
The system only accepts post codes of up to 7 characters.
The POIs do not appear. The POIs have not been selected. Select the POIs in the list of POIs.
The risk areas audible
warning does not work.
The audible warning is not active. Activate audible warnings in the Guidance options
menu, "Navigation - guidance", "Set parameters for
risk areas".
The system does not
suggest a detour around
an incident on the route.
The guidance criteria do not take account of TMC messages. Select the "Trafc info" function in the list of
guidance criteria.
I receive a Risk area alert
which is not on my route.
Other than guidance, the system announces all Risk areas positioned in a
cone located in front of the vehicle. It may provide an alert for a Risk area
located on nearby or parallel roads.
Zoom in on the map to view the exact position of
the Risk area. Select "On the route" to no longer
receive alerts other than guidance or to reduce the
time for the announcement.
305
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
Certain trafc jams along
the route are not indicated
in real time.
On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to receive the
trafc information.
Wait until the trafc information is being received
correctly (display of the trafc information icons on
the map).
The lters are too restrictive. Modify the "Geographic lter" settings.
In certain countries, only major routes (motorways...) are listed for the
trafc information.
This phenomenon is normal. The system is
dependent on the trafc information available.
The altitude is not
displayed.
On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may take up to 3 minutes to
receive more than 4 satellites correctly.
Wait until the system has started up completely.
Check that there is a GPS coverage of at least
4 satellites (long press on the SETUP button, then
select "GPS coverage").
Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel...) or the weather, the
conditions of reception of the GPS signal may vary.
This phenomenon is normal. The system is
dependent on the GPS signal reception conditions.
I am unable to connect
my Bluetooth telephone.
The telephone's Bluetooth function may be switched off or the telephone
may not be visible.
- Check that your telephone's Bluetooth function
is switched on.
- Check in the telephone settings that it is
"visible to all".
The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with the system. You can check the compatibility of your telephone
on www.peugeot.co.uk (services)
The volume of the
telephone connected
in Bluetooth mode is
inaudible.
The volume depends both on the system and on the telephone. Increase the volume of the audio system, to
maximum if required, and increase the volume of
the telephone if necessary.
The ambient noise level has an inuence on the quality of telephone
communication.
Reduce the ambient noise level (close the windows,
reduce the booster fan speed, slow down, ...).
306
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
Some contacts are
duplicated in the list.
The options for synchronizing contacts are synchronizing the contacts
on the SIM card, the contacts on the telephone, or both. When both
synchronizations are selected, some contacts may be duplicated.
Select "Display SIM card contacts" or "Display
telephone contacts".
Contacts are not shown in
alphabetical order.
Some telephones offer display options. Depending on the settings chosen,
contacts can be transferred in a specic order.
Modify the display setting in the telephone
directory.
The system does not receive
SMS text messages.
The Bluetooth mode does not permit sending SMS text messages to the
system.
The CD is ejected
automatically or is not
played by the player.
The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any
audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play.
- Check that the CD is inserted in the player the
right way up.
- Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot
be played if it is too damaged.
- Check the content in the case of a recorded
CD: refer to the information and advice in the
"MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS" section.
- The audio system's CD player does not play
DVDs.
-
Some recorded CDs will not be played by the audio
system because they are not of the correct quality.
The CD has been recorded in a format that is not compatible with the
player (udf, ...).
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not
recognised by the audio system.
There is a long waiting
period following the insertion
of a CD or connection of a
USB memory stick.
When a new medium is inserted, the system reads a certain amount of
data (directory, title, artist, etc.). This may take from a few seconds to a
few minutes.
This phenomenon is normal.
The CD player sound is
poor.
The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable
conditions.
The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitable. Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting
an ambience.
307
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
Some characters in the
media information are not
displayed correctly while
playing.
The audio system does not read some types of characters. Use standard characters to name tracks and
folders.
Playing of streaming les
does not start.
The peripheral device connected does not support automatic play. Start the playback from the device.
The names of tracks and
the track length are not
displayed on the screen
when streaming audio.
The Bluetooth prole does not allow the transfer of this information.
The quality of reception of
the radio station listened
to gradually deteriorates
or the stored stations do
not function (no sound,
87.5 Mhz is displayed...).
The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened to or
there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the vehicle
is travelling.
Activate the "RDS" function by means of the
short-cut menu to enable the system to check
whether there is a more powerful transmitter in the
geographical area.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) block
reception, including in RDS mode.
This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate
a fault with the audio system.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going
through an automatic car wash or in an underground car park).
Have the aerial checked by a PEUGEOT dealer.
I cannot nd some radio
stations in the list of
stations received.
The station is not received or its name has changed in the list.
Some radio stations send other information in place of their name (the title
of the song for example).
The system interprets this information as the name of the station.
The name of the radio
station changes.
308
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
When modifying the
treble and bass setting,
the choice of ambience is
cancelled.
The selection of an ambience imposes specic treble and bass settings. Modify the treble and bass settings or choose a
musical ambience to obtain the desired sound
quality.
When modifying the
ambience, the treble
and bass settings are
cancelled.
When modifying the
balance settings,
the "Driver" or "All
passengers" setting is
cancelled.
The choice of the "Driver" distribution setting imposes specic balance
settings.
When modifying
the "Driver" or "All
passengers" distribution
setting, the balance
settings are cancelled.
There is a difference in
sound quality between the
different audio sources
(radio, CD...).
For optimum sound quality, the audio settings for Volume, Bass, Treble,
Equalizer and Loudness can be adapted to the different sound sources,
which may result in audible differences when changing source (radio,
CD...).
Check that the audio settings for (Volume, Bass,
Treble, Equalizer, Loudness) are adapted to
the sources listened to. It is advisable to set the
AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Fr-Re balance,
Le-Ri balance) to the middle position, select the
"None", musical ambience and set the loudness
correction to the "Active" position in CD mode or to
the "Inactive" position in radio mode.
309
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
With the engine off, the
system switches off after
a few minutes of use.
When the engine is switched off, the system's operating time depends on
the state of charge of the battery.
The switch-off is normal: economy mode is activated automatically to
maintain the state of charge of the vehicle's battery, needed for engine
starting. (See the "Energy economy mode" section).
Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
charge.
Playback of my USB
memory stick starts only
after a very long wait
(around 2 to 3 minutes).
Some les supplied with the memory stick may greatly slow down access
to reading the memory stick (multiplication by 10 of the catalogue time).
Delete the les supplied with the memory stick and
limit the number of sub-folders in the le structure
on the memory stick.
When I connect my
iPhone as telephone and
to the USB port at the
same time, I am unable to
play the music les.
When the iPhone connects automatically as a telephone, it forces the
streaming function. The streaming function takes the place of the USB
function which is then not useable, there is a period without sound of the
track being played with Apple
®
players.
Disconnect and reconnect to the USB port (the
USB function takes priority over streaming).
310
3008_en_Chap12b_RT6-2-8_ed01-2015
311
3008_en_Chap12c_RD45_ed01_2015
PEUGEOT Connect Sound (RD5)
Your PEUGEOT Connect Sound (RD5) is coded in such
a way that it will only operate in your vehicle.
For safety reasons, the driver must only carry out
operations which require prolonged attention while the
vehicle is stationary.
When the engine is switched off and to prevent
discharging of the battery, the audio equipment may
switch off after a few minutes.
Audio system / Bluetooth
®
01 First steps
02 Steering mounted controls
03 Main menu
04 Audio
05 PEUGEOT Connect USB
06 Bluetooth
07 Screen menu map(s)
Frequently asked questions
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
312
313
314
315
318
321
324
329
CONTENTS
01
312
3008_en_Chap12c_RD45_ed01_2015
FIRST STEPS
Eject CD.
Select source:
radio, audio CD / MP3 CD, USB,
Jack connection, Streaming,
AUX.
Select the screen display
mode:
Date, audio functions, trip
computer, telephone.
Automatic frequency search
down/up.
Select previous/next CD, MP3
or USB track.
Audio settings: front/
rear fader, left/right
balance, bass/treble,
loudness, audio
ambiences.
Display the list of
local stations.
Long press: CD
tracks or MP3
folders (CD / USB).
TA (Trafc Announcements)
on/off.
Long press: PTY* (radio
Programme TYpe) mode.
Display main menu.The DARK button changes the screen display
for improved driving comfort at night.
1
st
press: upper bar only illuminated.
2
nd
press: black screen.
3
rd
press: return to standard display.
On/off, volume setting.
Buttons 1 to 6:
Select a pre-set radio station.
Long press: pre-set a station.
Select next frequency down/up.
Select previous/next MP3 folder.
Select previous/next folder / genre /
artist / playlist (USB).
Conrm.
Selection of AM / FM
wavebands.
Abandon the current
operation.
*
Available according to version.
02
313
3008_en_Chap12c_RD45_ed01_2015
STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS
Radio: automatic search for a higher frequency.
CD / MP3 / USB: selection of the next track.
CD / USB: continuous press: fast forwards play.
Move in the list.
Change audio source.
Conrm a selection.
Call/end call on the telephone.
Press for more than 2 seconds:
telephone main menu.
Radio: automatic search for a lower
frequency.
CD / MP3 / USB: selection of the
previous track.
CD / USB: continuous press: fast
reverse.
Move in the list.
Radio: select the previous/next pre-set
station.
USB: select genre / artist / folder from
the classication list.
Select the previous/next item in a menu.
Volume increase.
Volume decrease.
Mute: press the volume
increase and decrease
buttons simultaneously.
The sound is restored
by pressing one of the
two volume buttons.
03
314
3008_en_Chap12c_RD45_ed01_2015
MAIN MENU
Audio functions
Radio; CD; USB; AUX.
Screen C
For an overview of the menus
available, refer to the "Screen
menu map" section.
Trip computer
Enter distances; Alerts; State of functions.
Bluetooth
®
: Telephone - Audio
Pairing; Hands-free kit; Streaming.
Personalisation-conguration
Vehicle parameters; Display; Languages.
Screen A
04
315
3008_en_Chap12c_RD45_ed01_2015
AUDIO
Press the SOURCE button several
times in succession and select
the radio.
Press the BAND AST button
to select a waveband.
Briey press one of the buttons to
carry out an automatic search of the
radio stations.
Press one of the buttons to carry out
a manual search up / down for radio
frequencies.
Press the LIST REFRESH button to
display the list of stations received
locally (30 stations maximum).
To update this list, press for more
than two seconds.
The external environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks, ...)
may block reception, including in RDS mode. This is a normal effect of the
way in which radio waves are transmitted and does not indicate any failure
of the audio system.
RDSSelecting a station
Press the MENU button.
Select "Audio functions".
Select the "FM waveband
preferences" function.
Select "Activate RDS".
Press OK.
Press OK.
Press OK, RDS is displayed in the
screen.
In "Radio" mode, press OK directly to activate / deactivate
RDS mode.
RDS, if displayed, enables you to continue listening to the same station
by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However, in certain
conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be assured throughout
the country as radio stations do not cover 100 % of the territory. This
explains the loss of reception of a station that can occur during a journey.
04
316
3008_en_Chap12c_RD45_ed01_2015
AUDIO
Insert circular compact discs only.
Some anti-pirating systems, on original discs or CDs copied using a
personal recorder, may cause faults which are no reection on the
quality of the vehicle's player.
Insert a CD in the player, play begins automatically.
CD player
To play a disc which has already been
inserted, press the SOURCE button
several times in succession and
select CD.
Press one of the buttons to select a
track on the CD.
Press the LIST REFRESH button to display the list of tracks on
the CD.
Press and hold one of the buttons for
fast forward or fast back.
Receiving TA messages
Press the TA button to activate or
deactivate trafc messages.
The TA (Trafc Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert
messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a
radio station transmitting this type of message. When a trafc
report is transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, ...) is
interrupted automatically to play the TA message. Normal playback
of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of the
message.
04
317
3008_en_Chap12c_RD45_ed01_2015
The audio system will only play les with the extension ".mp3" with
a sampling rate of 22.05 KHz or 44.1 KHz. No other type of le
(.wma, .mp4, .m3u...) can be played.
In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when
recording, the ISO 9660 level 1.2 or Joliet le format is
recommended.
If the disc is recorded in another format, it may not be played
correctly.
It is recommended that the same recording format is always
used for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible
(4x maximum) for optimum sound quality.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet format is
recommended.
Use only USB memory sticks formatted FAT32 (File Allocation
Table).
It is advisable to restrict le names to 20 characters without using
special characters (e.g. " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing or displaying
problems.
Information and advice
AUDIO
It is recommended that you use genuine Apple
®
USB cables for
correct operation.
Insert an MP3 CD compilation in the player.
The audio equipment searches for all of the music tracks, which
may take anything between a few seconds and several tens of
seconds, before play begins.
Playing an MP3 CD compilation
On a single disc, the CD player can read up to 255 MP3 les
spread over 8 folder levels. However, it is advisable to keep to
a limit of two levels to reduce the access time before the CD is
played.
While the CD is being played, the folder structure is not followed.
All of the les are displayed on a single level.
To play a disc which has already
been inserted, press the SOURCE
button several times in succession
and select CD.
Press one of the buttons to select a
folder on the CD.
Press the LIST REFRESH button to display the list of directories of
the MP3 compilation.
Press and hold one of the buttons for
fast forward or backward play.
Press one of the buttons to select a
track on the CD.
05
318
3008_en_Chap12c_RD45_ed01_2015
PEUGEOT CONNECT USB
The system puts together playlists (temporary memory) created
over a period which depends on the capacity of the USB device.
The other sources are available during this time.
The playlists are updated each time the ignition is switched off or
each time a USB memory stick is connected.
When connecting for the rst time, the classication suggested
is by folder. When you reconnect, the classication selected
previously is retained.
Connect the memory stick to the port, directly or
using a lead. If the audio equipment is switched
on, the USB source is detected as soon as it is
connected. Play begins automatically after a delay
which depends on the capacity of the USB memory
stick.
The le formats supported are .mp3 (mpeg1 layer 3
only) and .wma (standard 9 only, 128 kbits/sec
compression).
Certain playlist formats are supported (.m3u, ...)
On reconnection of the previous memory stick
used, play is resumed automatically with the last
track played.
This unit consists of a USB port and an auxiliary
Jack socket*. The audio les are transmitted
from a portable device - digital player or a USB
memory stick - to your PEUGEOT Connect
Sound (RD5) and heard via the vehicle's
speakers.
USB memory stick or Apple
®
player of
generation 5 or later:
- Use only USB memory sticks formatted
FAT32 (File Allocation Table),
- the Apple
®
player lead is essential,
- navigation through the le database is also
possible by means of the steering mounted
controls.
Using the PEUGEOT CONNECT USB
Connecting a USB memory stick
Other Apple
®
players of earlier generations and
players using the MTP protocol*:
- play via Jack-Jack lead only (not supplied),
- navigation through the le database is from
the portable device.
* Depending on vehicle.
05
319
3008_en_Chap12c_RD45_ed01_2015
Using the PEUGEOT CONNECT USB
Press LIST briey to display the
previously selected classication.
Navigate through the list using the left/
right and up/down buttons.
Conrm the selection by pressing OK.
The lists available are Artist, Genre and Playlist (as dened in the
Apple
®
player).
Selection and Navigation are described in steps 1 to 4 above.
Do not connect a hard disk or USB connection device other
than audio equipment to the USB port. This could damage your
installation.
Connecting an Apple
®
player via the USB port
Press one of these buttons to gain
access to the previous / next track on
the classication list currently being
played.
Press and hold one of the buttons for
fast forward or backward play.
Press one of these buttons to
gain access to the previous / next
Genre, Folder, Artist or Playlist on
the classication list currently being
played.
Press and hold LIST to display the
different classications.
Select by Folder / Artist / Genre / Playlist,
press OK to select the classication
required, then press OK again to conrm.
- by Folder: all folders containing audio
les recognised on the peripheral
device.
- by Artist: all of the artist names
dened in the ID3 Tags, classied in
alphabetical order.
- by Genre: all of the genres dened in
the ID3 Tags.
- by Playlist: in accordance with the
playlists recorded on the USB device.
PEUGEOT CONNECT USB
05
320
3008_en_Chap12c_RD45_ed01_2015
The display and control is via the portable device.
First adjust the volume of your portable device.
Then adjust the volume of your audio
system.
Auxiliary socket (AUX)
Adjusting the volume of the auxiliary
source
PEUGEOT CONNECT USB
Do not connect a device to both the Jack auxiliary socket and the
USB port at the same time.
First adjust the volume on your portable device (to a high level).
Then adjust the volume on your audio system. Operation of
controls is via the portable device.
Press the SOURCE button several
times in succession and select AUX.
Connect the portable device
(MP3 player, …) to the auxiliary
Jack socket using an audio cable
(not supplied).
06
321
3008_en_Chap12c_RD45_ed01_2015
BLUETOOTH
As a safety measure and because they require prolonged attention
on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing of the Bluetooth
mobile telephone with the Bluetooth hands-free system of your
audio equipment must be carried out with the vehicle stationary
and the ignition on.
Press the MENU button.
A window is displayed with a message that a search is in progress.
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function
and ensure that it is "visible to all" (telephone
conguration).
In the menu, select:
- "Bluetooth: Telephone - Audio"
- "Bluetooth conguration"
- "Perform a Bluetooth search"
The services available depend on the network, the SIM card and the
compatibility of the Bluetooth device used.
Consult your telephone's manual and your operator to nd out which
services are available to you.
Pairing a Bluetooth
®
telephone
Screen C
The "Telephone" menu permits access to the following functions
in particular: "Directory"*, "Calls list", "Consult the paired
equipment".
The rst 4 telephones recognised are displayed in this window.
A virtual keypad is displayed in the
screen: enter a code with at least 4 digits.
Conrm by pressing OK.
A message that the pairing has been successful appears in the
screen.
Select the telephone to be connected from the list. Only one
telephone can be connected at a time.
A message in the screen indicates the telephone
chosen. To accept the pairing, enter the same code
on the telephone, then conrm with OK.
The automatic connection authorised is only active after the
telephone has been congured.
The directory and the call list can be accessed after the necessary
synchronisation period.
(Available according to model and version)
* If your telephone is fully compatible.
If pairing fails, the number of attempts is not limited.
Go to www.peugeot.co.uk for more information (compatibility,
more help, ...).
06
322
3008_en_Chap12c_RD45_ed01_2015
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed
display in the screen.
Select the YES tab on the display
using the buttons.
Conrm by pressing OK.
Press this button at the steering mounted controls
to accept the call.
Select "Manage the telephone call".
Select "Call".
From the "Bluetooth: Telephone - Audio" menu.
Or
Select "Calls list".
Or
Select "Directory".
BLUETOOTH
Receiving a call
Making a call
Press this button for more than two seconds for
access to your directory, then navigate using the
thumb wheel.
Or
To dial a number, use your telephone's keypad,
with the vehicle stationary.
06
323
3008_en_Chap12c_RD45_ed01_2015
Connect the telephone: see the "Telephone"
section.
Select in the "Bluetooth: Telephone - Audio" menu the telephone
to be connected.
The audio system connects to a newly paired telephone
automatically.
Bluetooth
®
audio streaming
Streaming allows music les on the telephone to be played via
the audio system.
* In certain cases, play of the audio les must be initiated from the keypad.
** If the telephone supports the function.
Activate the streaming source by
pressing the SOURCE button*.
Control of tracks to be played is via
the buttons on the audio system
control panel and the steering
mounted controls**. The contextual
information can be displayed in
the screen.
During a call, press this button for more than
2 seconds.
Conrm with OK to end the call.
BLUETOOTH
The system accesses the telephone's contacts directory, depending
on its compatibility, and while it is connected by Bluetooth.
With certain telephones connected by Bluetooth you can send a
contact to the directory of the audio system.
Contacts imported in this way are saved in a permanent directory
visible to all, whatever the telephone connected.
The menu for the directory is not accessible if it is empty.
Ending a call
07
324
3008_en_Chap12c_RD45_ed01_2015
SCREEN MENU MAP(S)
Radio-CD
* The settings vary according to the trim level
of the vehicle.
REG mode
CD repeat
Shufe play
Vehicle cong*
R wiper in rev
Options
Guide lighting
Diagnostic
RDS options
View
Abandon
1
2
3
3
1
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
Screen A
Main function
Option A1
Option A11
Option A
Option B...
1
2
3
1
07
325
3008_en_Chap12c_RD45_ed01_2015
Units
Temperature: °Celsius / °Fahrenheit
Fuel consumption:
KM/L - L/100 - MPG
1
2
2
SCREEN MENU MAP(S)
Display adjust
Month
Day
Hour
Minutes
Year
12 H/24 H mode
Language
Italiano
Nederlands
Portuguès
Português do Brasil
Français
Deutsch
Čeština
English
Hrvatski
Español
Magyar
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
07
326
3008_en_Chap12c_RD45_ed01_2015
SCREEN MENU MAP(S)
activate / deactivate RDS
activate / deactivate REG mode
activate / deactivate radiotext
Radio
activate / deactivate Intro
CD / MP3 CD
activate / deactivate track repeat
(the entire current CD for CD, the entire
current folder for MP3 CD)
activate / deactivate random play
(the entire current CD for CD, the entire
current folder for MP3 CD)
activate / deactivate track repeat
(of the current folder / artist / genre / playlist)
USB
activate / deactivate random play
(of the current folder / artist / genre / playlist)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Screen C
Press the OK dial for access to short-cut menus according
to the display on the screen.
07
327
3008_en_Chap12c_RD45_ed01_2015
SCREEN MENU MAP(S)
Audio functions
FM preferences
Alternative frequencies (RDS)
Audio functions
Activate / deactivate
Regional mode (REG)
Activate / deactivate
Radio-text information (RDTXT)
1
2
3
4
3
4
3
4
Activate / deactivate
Play modes
Album repeat (RPT)
Activate / deactivate
Track random play (RDM)
Activate / deactivate
2
3
4
3
4
4
Trip computer
Distance: x miles
Enter distance to destination
Vehicle diagnosis
Warning log
Systems activated or deactivated
State of systems
1
2
3
3
2
3
2
Screen C
Pressing the MENU button displays:
07
328
3008_en_Chap12c_RD45_ed01_2015
SCREEN MENU MAP(S)
Bluetooth: Telephone - Audio
Connect/Disconnect an equipment
Consult the paired equipment
Bluetooth conguration
Telephone function
Audio Streaming function
Delete a paired equipment
Perform a Bluetooth search
Calls list
Call
Directory
Terminate the current call
Manage the telephone call
Activate secret mode
1
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
2
3
4
2
3
3
Brightness-video adjustment
Display conguration
Dene the vehicle parameters*
Personalisation-conguration
Normal video
Inverse video
Brightness (- +) adjustment
Date and time adjustment
Setting the day/month/year
Setting the hour/minute
Choice of 12 h / 24 h mode
Choice of units
l/100 km - mpg - km/l
°Celsius / °Fahrenheit
Choice of language
1
2
4
3
2
4
4
3
4
4
2
3
4
4
4
* The settings vary according to vehicle.
329
3008_en_Chap12c_RD45_ed01_2015
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
There is a difference in
sound quality between
the different audio
sources (radio, CD...).
For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treble,
Ambience, Loudness) can be adapted to the different sound sources,
which may result in audible differences when changing source
(radio, CD...).
Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass,
Treble, Ambience, Loudness) are adapted to
the sources listened to. It is advisable to set
the AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear
Balance, Left-Right Balance) to the middle
position, select the musical ambience "None" and
set the loudness correction to the "Active" position
in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio
mode.
The CD is ejected
automatically or is not
played by the player.
The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any
audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play.
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not
recognised by the audio equipment.
- Check that the CD is inserted in the player the
right way up.
- Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot
be played if it is too damaged.
- Check the content in the case of a recorded
CD: consult the advice in the "Audio" section.
- The audio equipment's CD player does not
play DVDs.
- Due to their quality level, certain writeable
CDs will not be played by the audio system.
The message "USB
peripheral error" is
displayed on the screen.
The Bluetooth connection
is cut.
The battery of the peripheral may not be sufciently charged. Recharge the battery of the peripheral device.
The USB memory stick is not recognised.
The memory stick may be corrupt.
Reformat the memory stick.
330
3008_en_Chap12c_RD45_ed01_2015
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
I am unable to access my
voicemail.
Few telephones or service providers allow the use of this function.
The CD player sound is
poor.
The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable
conditions.
The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitable. Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting
an ambience.
The stored stations do
not function (no sound,
87.5 Mhz is displayed...).
An incorrect waveband is selected. Press the BAND AST button to return to the
waveband (AM, FM1, FM2, FMAST) on which the
stations are stored.
The trafc announcement
(TA) is displayed. I do
not receive any trafc
information.
The radio station is not part of the regional trafc information network. Tune to a radio station which broadcasts trafc
information.
The quality of reception
of the radio station
listened to gradually
deteriorates or the stored
stations do not function
(no sound, 87.5 Mhz is
displayed...).
The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened
to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the
vehicle is travelling.
Activate the RDS function to enable the system
to check whether there is a more powerful
transmitter in the geographical area.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) block
reception, including in RDS mode.
This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate
a failure of the audio equipment.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going
through a car wash or into an underground car park).
Have the aerial checked by a PEUGEOT dealer.
331
3008_en_Chap12c_RD45_ed01_2015
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
Sound cut-outs of 1 to
2 seconds in radio mode.
During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for any frequency
permitting better reception of the station.
Deactivate the RDS function if the phenomenon is
too frequent and always on the same route.
With the engine off,
the audio equipment
switches off after a few
minutes of use.
When the engine is switched off, the audio equipment operating time
depends on the battery charge.
The switch-off is normal: the audio equipment switches to economy mode
and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.
Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
charge.
The message "the audio
system is overheated"
appears on the display.
In order to protect the installation if the surrounding temperature is too
high, the audio equipment switches to an automatic thermal protection
mode leading to a reduction of the volume or stopping of the playing of
the CD.
Switch the audio system off for a few minutes to
allow the system to cool.
Alphabetical index
332
3008_en_Chap13_index-alpha_ed01-2015
Accessories ..................................................240
Additive, AdBlue ..............................23, 193-200
Additive, Diesel .....................................190, 191
Adjusting headlamps ......................................84
Adjusting head restraints ................................69
Adjusting seats ..........................................67, 68
Adjusting the date ........................ 32, 34, 35, 39
Adjusting the height and reach
of the steering wheel ....................................76
Adjusting the seat belt height .......................129
Adjusting the time ........................ 32, 34, 35, 39
Advice on driving ..........................................136
Airbags .................................................... 25, 132
Airbags, curtain ..................................... 134, 135
Airbags, front.........................................132, 135
Airbags, lateral ...................................... 134, 135
Air conditioning .........................................12, 60
Air conditioning, digital ...................................64
Air conditioning, manual .................................61
Air vents ..........................................................59
Alarm ............................................................... 50
Anti-pinch ................................................52, 102
Anti-theft .................................................49, 137
Armrest, front ............................................94, 96
Armrest, rear .................................................100
Assistance call ..............................................252
Audible warning ............................................123
Audio streaming (Bluetooth) ................ 296, 323
Audio systems .......................................255, 311
Battery, remote control .............................48, 49
Blanking screen (snow shield) ......................239
Blind, panoramic sunroof .............................. 101
Blinds, side .................................................... 108
BlueHDi ...................................................23, 193
Bluetooth (hands-free) ..........................278, 321
Bluetooth (telephone) ............................278, 321
Bonnet ...........................................................185
Boot .................................................................57
Brake discs ....................................................192
Brake lamps ..................................................218
Brakepads .....................................................192
Braking, dynamic emergency .......................143
Bulbs (changing) ...................................215, 220
A
Child seats ............................................109-121
Child seats, conventional ...................... 116, 117
Child seats, ISOFIX ...............................118-120
Closing the boot ........................................ 57, 58
Closing the doors ............................................54
Configuration, vehicle ..........32, 34, 36, 39, 328
Control, electric windows ................................52
Control, emergency door ................................56
Control, heated seats ......................................70
Control, panoramic sunroof blind .................101
Control stalk, lighting ......................................77
Control stalk, wipers ...........................86, 87, 89
Courtesy lamps ............................................... 91
Cover, load space .........................................104
Cruise control ................................................ 155
Cup holder ....................................................... 94
Capacity, fuel tank ........................................180
Cap, fuel filler ................................................180
CD .........................................................293, 316
CD, MP3 ........................................293, 316, 317
Central locking ............................................... 55
Changing a bulb ....................................215, 220
Changing a fuse .................................... 221-227
Changing a wheel ......................... 201, 209-213
Changing a wiper blade ..........................90, 232
Changing the remote control battery .............. 48
Checking the engine oil level ..................29, 188
Checking the levels ............................... 188-190
Checking tyre pressures
(using the kit) ..............................................208
Checks ...................................................186-192
Checks, routine ..................................... 191, 192
Child lock ...........................................52, 53, 122
Children (safety) ..................... 109-122, 131, 133
C
Battery ...........................................191, 228-230
Battery, charging ...........................................230
B
D
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) -
Digital radio .........................................290, 291
Date (setting) ................................ 32, 34, 35, 39
Daytime running lamps, LED ..........81, 215, 216
Deactivating ESC .......................................... 126
Deactivating the passenger
airbag .......................................................... 133
Deadlocking ....................................................46
Defrosting ......................................62, 63, 64, 74
Demisting ......................................62, 63, 64, 74
Dials and gauges ............................................14
Diesel ............................................................182
Dimensions ...................................................250
Dipstick ....................................................29, 188
Direction indicators ............... 123, 215, 216, 218
Display screen, instrument panel ...........14, 168
.
Alphabetical index
333
3008_en_Chap13_index-alpha_ed01-2015
Eco-driving (advice) ........................................ 12
Economy mode .............................................231
Electronic stability control (ESC) .................. 124
Emergency call .............................................252
Emergency warning lamps ...........................123
Emissions control system, SCR .............24, 193
Energy economy mode ................................. 231
Engine compartment ............................186, 187
Engine, Diesel
...182, 184, 187, 244, 245, 247, 249
Engine, petrol ........................182, 186, 242, 243
Engines .................................................242, 245
Environment .......12, 49, 63, 172, 190, 200, 230
ESC/ASR .......................................................124
Gauge, fuel..............................................14, 180
Gearbox, automatic ...........12, 14, 18, 140, 143,
144, 164, 192, 230
Gearbox, electronic ...........12, 14, 18, 140, 143,
144, 159, 169, 192, 230
Gearbox, manual ...........................12, 140, 143,
144, 158, 169, 192
Gear lever, automatic gearbox .....................164
Gear lever, electronic
gearbox ....................................................... 159
Gear lever, manual gearbox .........................158
Gear shift indicator .......................................168
Glove box ........................................................95
E
G
Display screen, multifunction
(with audio system) ....................33, 35, 38, 40
Display screen, multifunction
(without audio system) ..................................31
Distance alert ................................................ 149
Door pockets ...................................................94
Doors ...............................................................54
Driving economically.......................................12
Dynamic stability control
(DSC) .................................... 22, 125, 127, 143
Filter, particle ........................................190, 191
Filter, passenger compartment .....................191
Fitting a wheel ...............................................212
Fitting roof bars .............................................238
Fittings, boot .................................................103
Fittings, interior ...............................................94
Flap, fuel filler ........................................180, 183
Flashing indicators ........................................ 123
Floor, boot, adjustable ..................................107
Foglamps, front ............................... 79, 215, 217
Foglamps, rear ................................ 79, 218, 219
Folding the rear seats .....................................72
Folding/unfolding the door mirrors .................74
Fuel........................................................180, 182
Fuel consumption ......................................12, 41
Fuel tank........................................................183
Fusebox, dashboard .....................................222
Fusebox, engine compartment .....................225
Fuses .............................................................221
GPS ............................................................... 261
Grab handle on console .................................94
Grab handles ..................................................94
Grip control ...................................................127
Guidance (Navigation) ..................................261
Guide-me-home ........................................81, 82
H
Hazard warning lamps .................................. 123
Hazard warning lamps, automatic
operation ..................................................... 123
Headlamp adjustment .....................................84
Headlamps, automatic illumination ..........78, 82
Headlamps, dipped beam ................77, 215-217
Headlamps, directional ...........................85, 215
Headlamps, halogen .............................215, 216
Headlamps, main beam ................... 77, 215-217
Headlamps, Xenon .......................................215
Headlamp wash ..............................................88
Head restraints, front ......................................69
Head restraints, rear .......................................72
Head-up display ............................147, 152, 155
Heating ...................................................... 12, 61
Hill start assist ...............................................144
Hooks ............................................................105
Horn...............................................................123
Filling the fuel tank ........................ 180, 182, 183
Filter, air ........................................................191
Filter, oil ......................................................... 191
F
Identification, vehicle ....................................251
Ignition ...........................................................137
I
Alphabetical index
334
3008_en_Chap13_index-alpha_ed01-2015
Jack .......................................................201, 209
Jump starting ................................................229
Labels, identification ..................................... 251
Lamp, boot ......................................................93
LEDs - light-emitting diodes .........215, 216, 218
Key with remote control .................... 45-49, 137
Kit, hands-free ......................................278, 321
Kit, temporary puncture repair ......................203
Maintenance, routine ......................................12
Map reading lamps .........................................91
Markings, identification .................................251
Mat ..................................................................97
Menu, main ...................................................314
Menu short cuts ............................................260
K
J
L
M
Mirror, rear view ..............................................75
Mirrors, door....................................................74
Mirror, vanity ...................................................95
Misfuel prevention .........................................183
Mountings, Isofix ...........................................118
MP3 CD .................................................293, 317
Multimedia, rear ..............................................98
Navigation .....................................................261
Net, luggage retaining...................................106
Number plate lamps ..............................219, 220
N
Immobiliser, electronic ............................ 49, 137
Indicator, coolant temperature ........................ 26
Indicator, engine oil level ................................29
Indicator lamps, operation ........................16-26
Indicators, direction ......................................123
Inflating tyres ..........................................12, 251
Inflating tyres and accessories
(using the kit) ..............................................208
Input, auxiliary ...............................295, 297, 318
Instrument panels ...........................................14
ISOFIX ..........................................................119
Isofix mountings ............................................118
Level, AdBlue
®
additive .................................193
Level, brake fluid ........................................... 189
Level, Diesel additive ............................190, 191
Level, engine coolant ..............................26, 190
Level, engine oil ......................................29, 188
Level, headlamp wash ............................88, 190
Level, power steering fluid ............................ 189
Levels and checks ................................ 186-190
Level, screenwash fluid ..........................88, 190
Light-emitting diodes - LEDs ........215, 216, 218
Lighting ............................................................92
Lighting dimmer ..............................................30
Lighting, directional ......................................... 85
Lighting, guide-me home .......................... 81, 82
Lighting, interior ........................................91, 92
Lighting, mood ................................................92
Lighting, welcome ...........................................83
Loading ...................................................12, 238
Load reduction mode ....................................231
Locating your vehicle ......................................47
Locking from the inside ...................................55
Locking the boot..............................................46
Locking the doors ...........................................46
Long objects, transporting ...................... 71, 100
Low fuel level ................................................180
Luggage retaining rings ................................103
Oil change .....................................................188
Oil consumption ............................................188
OIl, engine ..................................................... 188
Opening the bonnet ......................................185
Opening the boot ............................................57
Opening the doors ..........................................54
Opening the panoramic sunroof blind ..........101
Opening the retractable colour screen ...........40
Opening the tailgate ..................................57, 58
O
Pads, brake ...................................................192
Paint colour code ..........................................251
Panoramic glass sunroof ..............................101
P
.
Alphabetical index
335
3008_en_Chap13_index-alpha_ed01-2015
Screenwash, front ...........................................88
Screenwash, rear ............................................ 87
SCR (Selective Catalytic
Reduction) ............................................24, 193
Seat belts ...............................................129-131
Seats, electric .................................................68
Seats, front ..........................................67, 68, 71
Seats, heated ..................................................70
Seats, rear .......................................................72
Serial number, vehicle ..................................251
Service indicator .............................................27
Servicing .........................................................12
Settings,
equipment .................... 31, 33, 35, 38, 39, 326
Sidelamps ............................... 77, 215, 216, 218
Side repeater ................................................217
Ski flap ..........................................................100
Snow chains ..................................................214
Socket, 12 V accessory ....................94, 97, 106
Socket, auxiliary jack ..............96, 293, 297, 320
Socket, JACK ..........................96, 297, 318, 320
Speed limiter .................................................152
Speedometer ..................................................14
Spotlamps, side ..............................................92
Starting the engine .......................137, 160, 164
Starting using another battery ......................229
Stay, bonnet ..................................................185
Steering mounted controls,
audio ...................................................258, 313
Steering wheel, adjustment ............................76
Stop & Start ..........................18, 41, 62, 65, 169,
181, 185, 191, 228
Storage .....................................94, 96, 100, 103
Storage box .....................................................95
Storage wells ................................................103
Stowing rings ................................................103
Sun visor .................................................95, 108
Switching off the engine ...............137, 163, 167
Radio .....................................................287, 315
Range ..............................................................41
Range, AdBlue ..............................................195
Reading lamps, rear ........................................91
Rear screen, demisting ............................. 63, 74
Recharging the battery .................................230
Reduction of electrical load ..........................231
Regeneration of the particle filter ................. 191
Reinitialising the electric windows .................. 52
Reinitialising the remote control .....................48
Reminder, key in ignition ...............................139
Remote control ..........................................45-49
Removing a wheel ........................................210
Removing the mat ........................................... 97
Replacing bulbs ....................................215-220
Replacing fuses .................................... 221-227
Replacing the air filter ................................... 191
Replacing the oil filter ...................................191
Replacing the passenger
compartment filter ......................................191
Reservoir, headlamp wash ...........................190
Reservoir, screenwash .................................190
Resetting the service indicator .......................28
Resetting the trip recorder ..............................30
Rev counter ..................................................... 14
Reversing camera .........................................176
Reversing lamp .............................................218
Risk areas (update) .......................................266
Roof bars ....................................................... 238
Running out of fuel (Diesel) ..........................184
R
Parking brake, electric .............21, 140-143, 192
Parking sensors, audible and visual .............174
Parking sensors, front ...................................174
Parking sensors, rear....................................174
Parking space sensor ..................................177
Particle filter ..........................................190, 191
PEUGEOT Connect Assistance ...................252
PEUGEOT Connect Navigation
(RT6) .....................................................38, 255
PEUGEOT Connect Packs ...........................252
PEUGEOT Connect SOS .............................252
PEUGEOT Connect Sound (RD5) ..........35, 311
Plates, identification......................................251
Player, MP3 CD .............................293, 316, 317
Players, music media ....................................292
Port, USB ................................96, 293, 297, 318
Pressures, tyres ............................................ 251
Pre-tensioning seat belts .............................. 131
Priming the fuel system ................................184
Protecting
children ................................109-122, 131, 133
Puncture ........................................................203
Safety, children ......................109-122, 131, 133
Satellite navigation system .....................38, 261
Screen, cold climate .....................................239
Screen, colour and mapping..........38, 259, 300
Screen, colour, retractable .............................40
Screen menu map ........................ 300, 324, 326
Screen, monochrome A .............. 31, 33, 42, 324
Screen, monochrome C ................... 35, 43, 326
Screen, multifunction
(with audio system) .......................................33
Screen, multifunction
(without audio system) ..................................31
S
Alphabetical index
336
3008_en_Chap13_index-alpha_ed01-2015
Synchronising the remote control ................... 48
Synthesiser, voice ......................................... 272
Table of weights ....................243, 244, 247, 249
Tables of engines ..................................242, 245
Tables of fuses .............................................. 221
Tank, AdBlue
®
additive ...............................................193, 198
Tank, fuel ............................................... 180, 183
Technical data ........................................242-251
Telephone .............................................278, 321
Temperature, coolant ......................................26
Third brake lamp ...........................................219
Three flashes
(direction indicators) ...................................123
Time (setting) ............................... 32, 34, 35, 39
TMC (Traffic info) ..........................................275
Tools ...................................................... 201, 209
Total distance recorder ...................................30
Towbar ........................................................... 236
Towed loads ..........................243, 244, 247, 249
Towing another vehicle .........................232, 233
Traction control (ASR) ............................22, 124
Traffic information (TA) .................276, 289, 316
Traffic information (TMC) ......................275, 276
Trailer ............................................................236
Trip computer .............................................41- 43
Trip distance recorder .....................................30
Tyres ........................................................12, 251
Tyre under-inflation
detection .............................................172, 210
U
T
Under floor storage .......................................106
Under-inflation (detection) ..............26, 172, 210
Unlocking ........................................................45
Unlocking from the inside ...............................55
Unlocking the boot ..........................................45
Unlocking the doors ........................................45
Updating risk areas .......................................266
UREA ....................................................193, 194
USB ................................. 96, 293, 297, 317, 318
USB (PEUGEOT Connect) .....................96, 318
Wiper, rear.......................................................87
Wipers .......................................................86, 89
Wipers, automatic rain
sensitive ..................................................86, 89
Ventilation .....................................59, 60, 61, 65
V
Warning and indicator
lamps ...................................................... 16-26
Warning lamps ..........................................19-26
Warning lamp, SCR emissions
control system ..............................................24
Warning lamp, Service....................................20
Washing (advice)...........................................176
Weights .................................243, 244, 247, 249
Wheel, spare .................................201, 209, 210
Window controls .............................................52
Wiper blades (changing) .........................90, 232
W
06-15
Reproduction or translation of all or part of
this document is prohibited without written
authorisation from Automobiles PEUGEOT.
Automobiles PEUGEOT declares, by
application of the provisions of the European
regulation (Directive 2000/53) relating to End of
Life Vehicles, that it achieves the objectives set
by this regulation and that recycled materials
are used in the manufacture of the products
that it sells.
Printed in the EU
For any work on your vehicle, use a qualified
workshop that has the technical information,
skills and equipment required, all of which a
PEUGEOT dealer is able to provide.
We draw your attention to the following
points:
- The fitting of electrical equipment or
accessories not listed by PEUGEOT may
cause faults and failures with the electrical
system of your vehicle. Contact a PEUGEOT
dealer for information on the range of
recommended accessories.
- As a safety measure, access to the
diagnostic socket, used for the vehicle's
electronic systems, is reserved strictly for
PEUGEOT dealers or qualified workshops,
equipped with the special diagnostic tool
required (risk of malfunctions of the vehicle's
electronic systems that could cause
breakdowns or serious accidents). The
manufacturer cannot be held responsible if
this advice is not followed.
- Any modification or adaptation not intended
or authorised by Automobiles PEUGEOT
or carried out without meeting the technical
requirements defined by the manufacturer
would lead to the suspension of the legal
and contractual warranties.
Labels are fitted in various areas of your
vehicle. They carry safety warnings
as well as vehicle identification
information. Do not remove them: they
form an integral part of your vehicle.
Anglais
Anglais
15388.0040
www.peugeot.com
